BA01484D/06/EN/03.

19 Products Solutions Services

71447187
2019-09-01
Valid as of version
01.05.zz (Device firmware)

Operating Instructions
Proline Promass E 300
HART
Coriolis flowmeter

Keep cover
ti

gh
tw
hile
n
ne
öff
ng
nnu
Sp a
 Proline Promass E 300 HART

• Make sure the document is stored in a safe place such that it is always available when
working on or with the device.
• To avoid danger to individuals or the facility, read the "Basic safety instructions" section
carefully, as well as all other safety instructions in the document that are specific to
working procedures.
• The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your
Endress+Hauser Sales Center will supply you with current information and updates to
these instructions.

2 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Table of contents

Table of contents

1 About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

1.1 Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.1 Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.1.1 Mounting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2.1 Safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.1.2 Environment and process
1.2.2 Electrical symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.2.3 Communication symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.1.3 Special mounting instructions . . . . . . 26
1.2.4 Tool symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6.2 Mounting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.2.5 Symbols for 6.2.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
certain types of information . . . . . . . . . 7 6.2.2 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 27
1.2.6 Symbols in graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6.2.3 Mounting the measuring device . . . . . 28
1.3 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6.2.4 Turning the transmitter housing . . . . 28
1.3.1 Standard documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6.2.5 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . 29
1.3.2 Supplementary device-dependent 6.3 Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.4 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 7 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
7.1 Connection conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 7.1.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.1 Requirements for the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . 10 7.1.2 Requirements for connecting cable . . . 30
2.2 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 7.1.3 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.3 Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 7.1.4 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 33
2.4 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 7.2 Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.5 Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 7.2.1 Connecting the transmitter . . . . . . . . 33
2.6 IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 7.2.2 Connecting the remote display and
2.7 Device-specific IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 operating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . 36
2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write 7.3 Ensuring potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . 36
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 7.3.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.7.2 Protecting access via a password . . . . 13 7.4 Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.7.3 Access via Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 7.4.1 Connection examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.7.4 Access via OPC-UA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 7.5 Ensuring the degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.7.5 Access via service interface (CDI- 7.6 Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
8 Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3 Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 8.1 Overview of operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.1 Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 8.2 Structure and function of the operating
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4 Incoming acceptance and product 8.2.1 Structure of the operating menu . . . . 43
8.2.2 Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 8.3 Access to the operating menu via the local
4.1 Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.2 Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 8.3.1 Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.2.1 Transmitter nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . 17 8.3.2 Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.2.2 Sensor nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 8.3.3 Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.2.3 Symbols on measuring device . . . . . . 19 8.3.4 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
8.3.5 Opening the context menu . . . . . . . . . 51
8.3.6 Navigating and selecting from list . . . 52
5 Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
8.3.7 Calling the parameter directly . . . . . . 52
5.1 Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 8.3.8 Calling up help text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.2 Transporting the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 8.3.9 Changing the parameters . . . . . . . . . 53
5.2.1 Measuring devices without lifting 8.3.10 User roles and related access
lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5.2.2 Measuring devices with lifting lugs . . 21 8.3.11 Disabling write protection via access
5.2.3 Transporting with a fork lift . . . . . . . . 21 code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5.3 Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 8.3.12 Enabling and disabling the keypad
lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Endress+Hauser 3
Table of contents Proline Promass E 300 HART

8.4 Access to the operating menu via the Web 10.5.8 Using parameters for device
browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
8.4.1 Function range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 10.6 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
8.4.2 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 10.7 Protecting settings from unauthorized
8.4.3 Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . 57 access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
8.4.4 Logging on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 10.7.1 Write protection via access code . . . 128
8.4.5 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 10.7.2 Write protection via write protection
8.4.6 Disabling the Web server . . . . . . . . . . 61 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8.4.7 Logging out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.5 Access to the operating menu via the 11 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
operating tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.5.1 Connecting the operating tool . . . . . . 62 11.1 Reading the device locking status . . . . . . . . . 131
8.5.2 Field Xpert SFX350, SFX370 . . . . . . . 65 11.2 Adjusting the operating language . . . . . . . . . 131
8.5.3 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 11.3 Configuring the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
8.5.4 DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 11.4 Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
8.5.5 AMS Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 11.4.1 "Measured variables" submenu . . . . . 132
8.5.6 SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 11.4.2 "Totalizer" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
8.5.7 Field Communicator 475 . . . . . . . . . . 68 11.4.3 "Input values" submenu . . . . . . . . . . 134
11.4.4 Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
11.5 Adapting the measuring device to the process
9 System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
9.1 Overview of device description files . . . . . . . . . 69 11.6 Performing a totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
9.1.1 Current version data for the device . . . 69 11.6.1 Function scope of the "Control
9.1.2 Operating tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Totalizer" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
9.2 Measured variables via HART protocol . . . . . . 70 11.6.2 Function scope of the "Reset all
9.2.1 Device variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 totalizers" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
9.3 Other settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 11.7 Showing data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

10 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 12 Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . 143

10.1 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 12.1 General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.2 Switching on the measuring device . . . . . . . . . 77 12.2 Diagnostic information via light emitting
10.3 Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10.4 Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 77 12.2.1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10.4.1 Defining the tag name . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 12.3 Diagnostic information on local display . . . . . 147
10.4.2 Setting the system units . . . . . . . . . . 79 12.3.1 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
10.4.3 Selecting and setting the medium . . . 82 12.3.2 Calling up remedial measures . . . . . 149
10.4.4 Displaying the I/O configuration . . . . 83 12.4 Diagnostic information in the Web browser . 149
10.4.5 Configuring the current input . . . . . . 84 12.4.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10.4.6 Configuring the status input . . . . . . . 86 12.4.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 150
10.4.7 Configuring the current output . . . . . 86 12.5 Diagnostic information in FieldCare or
10.4.8 Configuring the pulse/frequency/ DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 12.5.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
10.4.9 Configuring the relay output . . . . . . . 99 12.5.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 152
10.4.10 Configuring the double pulse output 102 12.6 Adapting the diagnostic information . . . . . . 152
10.4.11 Configuring the local display . . . . . . 103 12.6.1 Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . 152
10.4.12 Configuring the low flow cut off . . . . 108 12.6.2 Adapting the status signal . . . . . . . . 152
10.4.13 Configuring the partial filled pipe 12.7 Overview of diagnostic information . . . . . . . 153
detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 12.8 Pending diagnostic events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
10.5 Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 12.9 Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
10.5.1 Using the parameter to enter the 12.10 Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 12.10.1 Reading out the event logbook . . . . . 159
10.5.2 Calculated values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 12.10.2 Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . 160
10.5.3 Carrying out a sensor adjustment . . . 112 12.10.3 Overview of information events . . . . 160
10.5.4 Configuring the totalizer . . . . . . . . . 113 12.11 Resetting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 161
10.5.5 Carrying out additional display 12.11.1 Function scope of the "Device reset"
configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
10.5.6 WLAN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 12.12 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
10.5.7 Configuration management . . . . . . . 122 12.13 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
12.14 Device history and compatibility . . . . . . . . . . 166

4 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Table of contents

13 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.1 Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.1.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.1.2 Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.2 Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

14 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
14.1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
14.1.1 Repair and conversion concept . . . . . 168
14.1.2 Notes for repair and conversion . . . . 168
14.2 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
14.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
14.4 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
14.5 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
14.5.1 Removing the measuring device . . . . 168
14.5.2 Disposing of the measuring device . . 169

15 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
15.1 Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
15.1.1 For the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
15.1.2 For the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
15.2 Communication-specific accessories . . . . . . . 171
15.3 Service-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
15.4 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

16 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

16.1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
16.2 Function and system design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
16.3 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
16.4 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
16.5 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
16.6 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
16.7 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
16.8 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
16.9 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
16.10 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
16.11 Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
16.12 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
16.13 Application packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
16.14 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
16.15 Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Endress+Hauser 5
About this document Proline Promass E 300 HART

1 About this document

1.1 Document function

These Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required in various phases
of the life cycle of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance and
storage, to mounting, connection, operation and commissioning through to
troubleshooting, maintenance and disposal.

1.2 Symbols

1.2.1 Safety symbols

DANGER
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation will result in
serious or fatal injury.
WARNING
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in
serious or fatal injury.
CAUTION
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in
minor or medium injury.
NOTICE
This symbol contains information on procedures and other facts which do not result in
personal injury.

1.2.2 Electrical symbols

Symbol Meaning

Direct current

Alternating current

Direct current and alternating current

Ground connection
A grounded terminal which, as far as the operator is concerned, is grounded via a
grounding system.

Protective Earth (PE)

A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other
connections.
The ground terminals are situated inside and outside the device:
• Inner ground terminal: Connects the protectiv earth to the mains supply.
• Outer ground terminal: Connects the device to the plant grounding system.

1.2.3 Communication symbols

Symbol Meaning

Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)

Communication via a wireless, local network.

LED
Light emitting diode is off.

6 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART About this document

Symbol Meaning

LED
Light emitting diode is on.

LED
Light emitting diode is flashing.

1.2.4 Tool symbols

Symbol Meaning

Flat blade screwdriver

Allen key

Open-ended wrench

1.2.5 Symbols for certain types of information

Symbol Meaning

Permitted
Procedures, processes or actions that are permitted.

Preferred
Procedures, processes or actions that are preferred.

Forbidden
Procedures, processes or actions that are forbidden.

Tip
Indicates additional information.

Reference to documentation.

A Reference to page.

Reference to graphic.

Notice or individual step to be observed.

1. , 2. , 3. … Series of steps.

Result of a step.

Help in the event of a problem.

Visual inspection.

1.2.6 Symbols in graphics

Symbol Meaning

1, 2, 3, ... Item numbers

1. , 2. , 3. , … Series of steps

A, B, C, ... Views

A-A, B-B, C-C, ... Sections

Hazardous area
-

Endress+Hauser 7
About this document Proline Promass E 300 HART

Symbol Meaning

Safe area (non-hazardous area)

.
Flow direction

1.3 Documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to the
following:
• W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number
from nameplate
• Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate or
scan the 2D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate
Detailed list of the individual documents along with the documentation code
→  203

1.3.1 Standard documentation

Document type Purpose and content of the document

Technical Information Planning aid for your device

The document contains all the technical data on the device and provides
an overview of the accessories and other products that can be ordered for
the device.

Sensor Brief Operating Instructions Guides you quickly to the 1st measured value - Part 1
The Sensor Brief Operating Instructions are aimed at specialists with
responsibility for installing the measuring device.
• Incoming acceptance and product identification
• Storage and transport
• Installation

Transmitter Brief Operating Guides you quickly to the 1st measured value - Part 2
Instructions The Transmitter Brief Operating Instructions are aimed at specialists with
responsibility for commissioning, configuring and parameterizing the
measuring device (until the first measured value).
• Product description
• Installation
• Electrical connection
• Operation options
• System integration
• Commissioning
• Diagnostic information

Description of Device Parameters Reference for your parameters

The document provides a detailed explanation of each individual
parameter in the Expert operating menu. The description is aimed at
those who work with the device over the entire life cycle and perform
specific configurations.

1.3.2 Supplementary device-dependent documentation

Additional documents are supplied depending on the device version ordered: Always
comply strictly with the instructions in the supplementary documentation. The
supplementary documentation is an integral part of the device documentation.

1.4 Registered trademarks

HART®
Registered trademark of the FieldComm Group, Austin, Texas, USA

8 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART About this document

TRI-CLAMP®
Registered trademark of Ladish & Co., Inc., Kenosha, USA

Endress+Hauser 9
Safety instructions Proline Promass E 300 HART

2 Safety instructions

2.1 Requirements for the personnel

The personnel for installation, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance must fulfill
the following requirements:
‣ Trained, qualified specialists must have a relevant qualification for this specific function
and task.
‣ Are authorized by the plant owner/operator.
‣ Are familiar with federal/national regulations.
‣ Before starting work, read and understand the instructions in the manual and
supplementary documentation as well as the certificates (depending on the
application).
‣ Follow instructions and comply with basic conditions.
The operating personnel must fulfill the following requirements:
‣ Are instructed and authorized according to the requirements of the task by the facility's
owner-operator.
‣ Follow the instructions in this manual.

2.2 Designated use

Application and media
The measuring device described in these Operating Instructions is intended only for flow
measurement of liquids and gases.

Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentially
explosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
Measuring devices for use in hazardous areas, in hygienic applications or where there is an
increased risk due to process pressure, are labeled accordingly on the nameplate.
To ensure that the measuring device remains in proper condition for the operation time:
‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.
‣ Only use the measuring device in full compliance with the data on the nameplate and
the general conditions listed in the Operating Instructions and supplementary
documentation.
‣ Based on the nameplate, check whether the ordered device is permitted for the
intended use in the hazardous area (e.g. explosion protection, pressure vessel safety).
‣ Use the measuring device only for media to which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.
‣ If the ambient temperature of the measuring device is outside the atmospheric
temperature, it is absolutely essential to comply with the relevant basic conditions as
specified in the device documentation. →  8
‣ Protect the measuring device permanently against corrosion from environmental
influences.

Incorrect use
Non-designated use can compromise safety. The manufacturer is not liable for damage
caused by improper or non-designated use.

LWARNING
Danger of breakage due to corrosive or abrasive fluids and ambient conditions!
‣ Verify the compatibility of the process fluid with the sensor material.
‣ Ensure the resistance of all fluid-wetted materials in the process.
‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.

10 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Safety instructions

NOTICE
Verification for borderline cases:
‣ For special fluids and fluids for cleaning, Endress+Hauser is glad to provide assistance
in verifying the corrosion resistance of fluid-wetted materials, but does not accept any
warranty or liability as minute changes in the temperature, concentration or level of
contamination in the process can alter the corrosion resistance properties.

Residual risks
LWARNING
The electronics and the medium may cause the surfaces to heat up. This presents a
burn hazard!
‣ For elevated fluid temperatures, ensure protection against contact to prevent burns.
LWARNING
Danger of housing breaking due to measuring tube breakage!
If a measuring tube ruptures, the pressure inside the sensor housing will rise according to
the operating process pressure.
‣ Use a rupture disk.
LWARNING
Danger from medium escaping!
For device versions with a rupture disk: medium escaping under pressure can cause injury
or material damage.
‣ Take precautions to prevent injury and material damage if the rupture disk is actuated.

2.3 Workplace safety

For work on and with the device:
‣ Wear the required personal protective equipment according to federal/national
regulations.

For welding work on the piping:

‣ Do not ground the welding unit via the measuring device.
If working on and with the device with wet hands:
‣ Due to the increased risk of electric shock, gloves must be worn.

2.4 Operational safety

Risk of injury.
‣ Operate the device in proper technical condition and fail-safe condition only.
‣ The operator is responsible for interference-free operation of the device.
Conversions to the device
Unauthorized modifications to the device are not permitted and can lead to unforeseeable
dangers.
‣ If, despite this, modifications are required, consult with Endress+Hauser.
Repair
To ensure continued operational safety and reliability,
‣ Carry out repairs on the device only if they are expressly permitted.
‣ Observe federal/national regulations pertaining to repair of an electrical device.
‣ Use original spare parts and accessories from Endress+Hauser only.

Endress+Hauser 11
Safety instructions Proline Promass E 300 HART

2.5 Product safety

This measuring device is designed in accordance with good engineering practice to meet
state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition in
which it is safe to operate.
It meets general safety standards and legal requirements. It also complies with the EU
directives listed in the device-specific EU Declaration of Conformity. Endress+Hauser
confirms this by affixing the CE mark to the device.

2.6 IT security
Our warranty is valid only if the device is installed and used as described in the Operating
Instructions. The device is equipped with security mechanisms to protect it against any
inadvertent changes to the settings.
IT security measures, which provide additional protection for the device and associated
data transfer, must be implemented by the operators themselves in line with their security
standards.

2.7 Device-specific IT security

The device offers a range of specific functions to support protective measures on the
operator's side. These functions can be configured by the user and guarantee greater in-
operation safety if used correctly. An overview of the most important functions is provided
in the following section.

Function/interface Factory setting Recommendation

Write protection via hardware write Not enabled. On an individual basis following risk
protection switch →  12 assessment.

Access code Not enabled Assign a customized access code during

(also applies for Web server login or (0000). commissioning.
FieldCare connection) →  13

WLAN Enabled. On an individual basis following risk

(order option in display module) assessment.

WLAN security mode Enabled (WPA2- Do not change.

PSK)

WLAN passphrase Serial number Assign an individual WLAN passphrase during

(password) →  13 commissioning.

WLAN mode Access Point On an individual basis following risk

assessment.

Web server→  13 Enabled. On an individual basis following risk

assessment.

CDI-RJ45 service interface →  14 – On an individual basis following risk

assessment.

2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write protection

Write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or operating tool
(e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be disabled via a write protection switch (DIP switch on
the motherboard). When hardware write protection is enabled, only read access to the
parameters is possible.
Hardware write protection is disabled when the device is delivered →  129.

12 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Safety instructions

2.7.2 Protecting access via a password

Different passwords are available to protect write access to the device parameters or access
to the device via the WLAN interface.
• User-specific access code
Protect write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or
operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare). Access authorization is clearly regulated
through the use of a user-specific access code.
• WLAN passphrase
The network key protects a connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook or
tablet) and the device via the WLAN interface which can be ordered as an option.
• Infrastructure mode
When the device is operated in infrastructure mode, the WLAN passphrase corresponds
to the WLAN passphrase configured on the operator side.

User-specific access code

Write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or operating tool
(e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be protected by the modifiable, user-specific access code
(→  128).
When the device is delivered, the device does not have an access code and is equivalent to
0000 (open).

WLAN passphrase: Operation as WLAN access point

A connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook or tablet) and the device via the
WLAN interface (→  64), which can be ordered as an optional extra, is protected by
the network key. The WLAN authentication of the network key complies with the
IEEE 802.11 standard.
When the device is delivered, the network key is pre-defined depending on the device. It
can be changed via the WLAN settings submenu in the WLAN passphrase parameter
(→  121).

Infrastructure mode
A connection between the device and WLAN access point is protected by means of an SSID
and passphrase on the system side. Please contact the relevant system administrator for
access.

General notes on the use of passwords

• The access code and network key supplied with the device should be changed during
commissioning.
• Follow the general rules for generating a secure password when defining and managing
the access code or network key.
• The user is responsible for the management and careful handling of the access code and
network key.
• For information on configuring the access code or on what to do if you lose the
password, see the "Write protection via access code" section →  128

2.7.3 Access via Web server

The device can be operated and configured via a Web browser with the integrated Web
server (→  55). The connection is via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) or the WLAN
interface.
The Web server is enabled when the device is delivered. The Web server can be disabled if
necessary (e.g. after commissioning) via the Web server functionality parameter.

Endress+Hauser 13
Safety instructions Proline Promass E 300 HART

The device and status information can be hidden on the login page. This prevents
unauthorized access to the information.
For detailed information on device parameters, see:
The "Description of Device Parameters" document →  203.

2.7.4 Access via OPC-UA

The device can communicate with OPC UA clients using the "OPC UA Server" application
package.
The OPC UA server integrated in the device can be accessed via the WLAN access point
using the WLAN interface - which can be ordered as an optional extra - or the service
interface (CDI- RJ45) via Ethernet network. Access rights and authorization as per
separate configuration.
The following Security Modes are supported as per the OPC UA Specification (IEC 62541):
• None
• Basic128Rsa15 – signed
• Basic128Rsa15 – signed and encrypted

2.7.5 Access via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

The device can be connected to a network via the service interface (CDI-RJ45). Device-
specific functions guarantee the secure operation of the device in a network.
The use of relevant industrial standards and guidelines that have been defined by national
and international safety committees, such as IEC/ISA62443 or the IEEE, is recommended.
This includes organizational security measures such as the assignment of access
authorization as well as technical measures such as network segmentation.
Transmitters with an Ex de approval may not be connected via the service interface
(CDI-RJ45)!
Order code for "Approval transmitter + sensor", options (Ex de): BA, BB, C1, C2, GA,
GB, MA, MB, NA, NB

14 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Product description

3 Product description
The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor.
The device is available as a compact version:
The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.

3.1 Product design

1 2 3 4

Ni
Spcht Pow
an un
Do nu te er
en no ngr

öf
er t op öf

f ne
Ne gize fn
so pa den when

n
us s ou
tens vr en
ionir

ter
I/O

un
Nicht
la y
i sp

e
ar

ES
C
–

5
A0029586

1 Important components of a measuring device

1 Connection compartment cover
2 Display module
3 Transmitter housing
4 Electronics compartment cover
5 Sensor

Endress+Hauser 15
Incoming acceptance and product identification Proline Promass E 300 HART

4 Incoming acceptance and product

identification

4.1 Incoming acceptance

Are the order codes on the
delivery note (1) and the
product sticker (2) identical?
1 1
2 2

Are the goods undamaged?

Do the nameplate data

Order code:
Ser. no.:
match the ordering
information on the delivery
Ext. ord. cd.:

note?
i i

Date:

Is the document folder

present with accompanying
documents?
Is the optional CD-ROM with
the Technical
Documentation present?

• If one of the conditions is not satisfied, contact your Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
• Depending on the device version, the CD-ROM might not be part of the delivery!
The Technical Documentation is available via the Internet or via the Endress+Hauser
Operations App, see the "Product identification" section →  17.

4.2 Product identification

The following options are available for identification of the device:
• Nameplate specifications
• Order code with breakdown of the device features on the delivery note
• Enter serial numbers from nameplates in the W@M Device Viewer
(www.endress.com/deviceviewer): All information about the device is displayed.
• Enter the serial number from nameplates in the Endress+Hauser Operations App or scan
the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate using the Endress+Hauser Operations
App: All information about the device is displayed.

16 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Incoming acceptance and product identification

For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to the
following:
• The "Additional standard documentation on the device"→  8 and "Supplementary
device-dependent documentation"→  8 sections
• The W@M Device Viewer: enter the serial number from the nameplate
(www.endress.com/deviceviewer)
• The Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate or
scan the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate.

4.2.1 Transmitter nameplate

1 2 3 4 5

Order code:
Ser. no.:
Ext. ord. cd.:
20 6
19
7
18
17
16
15
14 8
i i

Date: 9

13 12 11 10
A0029192

2 Example of a transmitter nameplate

1 Manufacturing location
2 Name of the transmitter
3 Order code
4 Serial number (ser. no.)
5 Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.)
6 Degree of protection
7 Space for approvals: use in hazardous areas
8 Electrical connection data: available inputs and outputs
9 2-D matrix code
10 Manufacturing date: year-month
11 Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation
12 Space for approvals and certificates: e.g. CE mark, C-Tick
13 Space for degree of protection of connection and electronics compartment when used in hazardous areas
14 Firmware version (FW) and device revision (Dev.Rev.) from the factory
15 Space for additional information in the case of special products
16 Permitted temperature range for cable
17 Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)
18 Information on cable gland
19 Available inputs and outputs, supply voltage
20 Electrical connection data: supply voltage

Endress+Hauser 17
Incoming acceptance and product identification Proline Promass E 300 HART

4.2.2 Sensor nameplate

2
Order code: 6
Ser. no.: 7
Ext. ord. cd.: 8

4
5

A0029206

3 Example of a sensor nameplate, part 1

1 Name of the sensor
2 Manufacturing location
3 Nominal diameter of the sensor; flange nominal diameter/nominal pressure; sensor test pressure; medium
temperature range; material of measuring tube and manifold
4 Sensor-specific information
5 CE mark, C-Tick
6 Order code
7 Serial number (ser. no.)
8 Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.)

2
i i 3

4
Date:

6 5
A0029207

4 Example of a sensor nameplate, part 2

1 Approval information for explosion protection, Pressure Equipment Directive and degree of protection
2 Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)
3 Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation
4 2-D matrix code
5 Flow direction
6 Manufacturing date: year-month

Order code
The measuring device is reordered using the order code.
Extended order code
• The device type (product root) and basic specifications (mandatory features) are
always listed.
• Of the optional specifications (optional features), only the safety and approval-
related specifications are listed (e.g. LA). If other optional specifications are also
ordered, these are indicated collectively using the # placeholder symbol (e.g. #LA#).
• If the ordered optional specifications do not include any safety and approval-related
specifications, they are indicated by the + placeholder symbol (e.g. XXXXXX-ABCDE
+).

18 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Incoming acceptance and product identification

4.2.3 Symbols on measuring device

Symbol Meaning

WARNING!
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in serious
or fatal injury.

Reference to documentation
Refers to the corresponding device documentation.

Protective ground connection

A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other connections.

Endress+Hauser 19
Storage and transport Proline Promass E 300 HART

5 Storage and transport

5.1 Storage conditions

Observe the following notes for storage:
‣ Store in the original packaging to ensure protection from shock.
‣ Do not remove protective covers or protective caps installed on process connections.
They prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in the
measuring tube.
‣ Protect from direct sunlight to avoid unacceptably high surface temperatures.
‣ Store in a dry and dust-free place.
‣ Do not store outdoors.
Storage temperature→  188

5.2 Transporting the product

Transport the measuring device to the measuring point in the original packaging.

A0029252

Do not remove protective covers or caps installed on process connections. They

prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in the
measuring tube.

5.2.1 Measuring devices without lifting lugs

LWARNING
Center of gravity of the measuring device is higher than the suspension points of the
webbing slings.
Risk of injury if the measuring device slips.
‣ Secure the measuring device against slipping or turning.
‣ Observe the weight specified on the packaging (stick-on label).

A0029214

20 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Storage and transport

5.2.2 Measuring devices with lifting lugs

LCAUTION
Special transportation instructions for devices with lifting lugs
‣ Only use the lifting lugs fitted on the device or flanges to transport the device.
‣ The device must always be secured at two lifting lugs at least.

5.2.3 Transporting with a fork lift

If transporting in wood crates, the floor structure enables the crates to be lifted lengthwise
or at both sides using a forklift.

5.3 Packaging disposal

All packaging materials are environmentally friendly and 100 % recyclable:
• Outer packaging of device
Polymer stretch wrap that complies with EU Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS)
• Packaging
• Wooden crate treated in accordance with ISPM 15 standard, confirmed by IPPC logo
• Cardboard box in accordance with European packaging guideline 94/62EC,
recyclability confirmed by Resy symbol
• Carrying and securing materials
• Disposable plastic pallet
• Plastic straps
• Plastic adhesive strips
• Filler material
Paper pads

Endress+Hauser 21
Installation Proline Promass E 300 HART

6 Installation

6.1 Installation conditions

No special measures such as supports are necessary. External forces are absorbed by the
construction of the device.

6.1.1 Mounting position

Mounting location

A0028772

To prevent measuring errors arising from accumulation of gas bubbles in the measuring
tube, avoid the following mounting locations in the pipe:
• Highest point of a pipeline.
• Directly upstream of a free pipe outlet in a down pipe.

Installation in down pipes

However, the following installation suggestion allows for installation in an open vertical
pipeline. Pipe restrictions or the use of an orifice with a smaller cross-section than the
nominal diameter prevent the sensor running empty while measurement is in progress.

A0028773

5 Installation in a down pipe (e.g. for batching applications)

1 Supply tank
2 Sensor
3 Orifice plate, pipe restriction
4 Valve
5 Batching tank

22 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Installation

DN Ø orifice plate, pipe restriction

[mm] [in] [mm] [in]

8 ³⁄₈ 6 0.24

15 ½ 10 0.40

25 1 14 0.55

40 1½ 22 0.87

50 2 28 1.10

80 3 50 1.97

Orientation
The direction of the arrow on the sensor nameplate helps you to install the sensor
according to the flow direction (direction of medium flow through the piping).

Orientation Recommendation
1)
A Vertical orientation

A0015591

2)
B Horizontal orientation, transmitter at
top Exceptions:
→  6,  23
A0015589

3)
C Horizontal orientation, transmitter at
bottom Exceptions:
→  6,  23
A0015590

D Horizontal orientation, transmitter at

side
A0015592

1) This orientation is recommended to ensure self-draining.

2) Applications with low process temperatures may decrease the ambient temperature. To maintain the
minimum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended.
3) Applications with high process temperatures may increase the ambient temperature. To maintain the
maximum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended.

If a sensor is installed horizontally with a curved measuring tube, match the position of the
sensor to the fluid properties.

1 2
A0028774

6 Orientation of sensor with curved measuring tube

1 Avoid this orientation for fluids with entrained solids: Risk of solids accumulating.
2 Avoid this orientation for outgassing fluids: Risk of gas accumulating.

Endress+Hauser 23
Installation Proline Promass E 300 HART

Inlet and outlet runs

No special precautions need to be taken for fittings which create turbulence, such as
valves, elbows or T-pieces, as long as no cavitation occurs →  24.

A0029322 A0029323

Installation dimensions
For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical
Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section.

6.1.2 Environment and process requirements

Ambient temperature range

Measuring device • –40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)

• Order code for "Test, certificate", option JP:
–50 to +60 °C (–58 to +140 °F)

Readability of the local –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)

display The readability of the display may be impaired at temperatures outside the
temperature range.

Dependency of ambient temperature on medium temperature→  189

‣ If operating outdoors:
Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions.

You can order a weather protection cover from Endress+Hauser. →  170.

System pressure
It is important that cavitation does not occur, or that gases entrained in the liquids do not
outgas.
Cavitation is caused if the pressure drops below the vapor pressure:
• In liquids that have a low boiling point (e.g. hydrocarbons, solvents, liquefied gases)
• In suction lines
‣ Ensure the system pressure is sufficiently high to prevent cavitation and outgassing.
For this reason, the following mounting locations are recommended:
• At the lowest point in a vertical pipe
• Downstream from pumps (no danger of vacuum)

A0028777

24 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Installation

Thermal insulation
In the case of some fluids, it is important to keep the heat radiated from the sensor to the
transmitter to a low level. A wide range of materials can be used for the required
insulation.

NOTICE
Electronics overheating on account of thermal insulation!
‣ Recommended orientation: horizontal orientation, transmitter housing pointing
downwards.
‣ Do not insulate the transmitter housing .
‣ Maximum permissible temperature at the lower end of the transmitter housing:
80 °C (176 °F)
‣ Thermal insulation with extended neck free: We recommend that you do not insulate
the extended neck in order to ensure optimum dissipation of heat.

A0034391

7 Thermal insulation with extended neck free

Heating
NOTICE
Electronics can overheat due to elevated ambient temperature!
‣ Observe maximum permitted ambient temperature for the transmitter .
‣ Depending on the fluid temperature, take the device orientation requirements into
account .

NOTICE
Danger of overheating when heating
‣ Ensure that the temperature at the lower end of the transmitter housing does not
exceed 80 °C (176 °F).
‣ Ensure that sufficient convection takes place at the transmitter neck.
‣ Ensure that a sufficiently large area of the transmitter neck remains exposed. The
uncovered part serves as a radiator and protects the electronics from overheating and
excessive cooling.
‣ When using in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the information in the
device-specific Ex documentation. For detailed information on the temperature tables,
see the separate document entitled "Safety Instructions" (XA) for the device.

Heating options
If a fluid requires that no heat loss should occur at the sensor, users can avail of the
following heating options:
• Electrical heating, e.g. with electric band heaters
• Via pipes carrying hot water or steam
• Via heating jackets

Vibrations
The high oscillation frequency of the measuring tubes ensures that the correct operation of
the measuring system is not influenced by plant vibrations.

Endress+Hauser 25
Installation Proline Promass E 300 HART

6.1.3 Special mounting instructions

Drainability
The measuring tubes can be completely drained and protected against solids build-up in
vertical orientation.

Sanitary compatibility
When installing in hygienic applications, please refer to the information in the
"Certificates and approvals/hygienic compatibility" section →  199.

Rupture disk
Information that is relevant to the process: →  191.

LWARNING
Danger from medium escaping!
Medium escaping under pressure can cause injury or material damage.
‣ Take precautions to prevent danger to persons and damage if the rupture disk is
actuated.
‣ Observe information on the rupture disk sticker.
‣ Make sure that the function and operation of the rupture disk is not impeded through
the installation of the device.
‣ Do not use a heating jacket.
‣ Do not remove or damage the rupture disk.
‣ After the rupture disk is actuated, do not operate the measuring device any more.
The position of the rupture disk is indicated on a sticker applied over it. If the rupture disk
is triggered, the sticker is destroyed. The disk can therefore be visually monitored.

DN 8 (!⁄#")...50 (2") DN 80 (3")

RUPTURE DISK

A0029956

1 Rupture disk label

Zero point adjustment

All measuring devices are calibrated in accordance with state-of-the-art technology.
Calibration takes place under reference conditions→  184. Therefore, a zero point
adjustment in the field is generally not required.
Experience shows that zero point adjustment is advisable only in special cases:
• To achieve maximum measuring accuracy even with low flow rates.
• Under extreme process or operating conditions (e.g. very high process temperatures or
very high-viscosity fluids).

26 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Installation

Protective cover

280 (11.0) 255 (10.0)

146 (5.75) 134 (5.3) 12 (0.47) 30 (1.18)

48 (1.9)
A0029553

Cover locking
NOTICE
Order code for "Housing", option L "Cast, stainless": The covers of the transmitter
housing are provided with a borehole to lock the cover.
The cover can be locked using screws and a chain or cable provided by the customer.
‣ It is recommended to use stainless steel cables or chains.
‣ If a protective coating is applied, it is recommended to use a heat shrink tube to protect
the housing paint.

1
1

1
2 SW 2.5
5 (0.2) min. 15 (0.6)
M3

A0029800

1 Cover borehole for the securing screw

2 Securing screw to lock the cover

6.2 Mounting the measuring device

6.2.1 Required tools

For sensor
For flanges and other process connections: Corresponding mounting tools

6.2.2 Preparing the measuring device

1. Remove all remaining transport packaging.

Endress+Hauser 27
Installation Proline Promass E 300 HART

2. Remove any protective covers or protective caps present from the sensor.
3. If present, remove transport protection of the rupture disk.
4. Remove stick-on label on the electronics compartment cover.

6.2.3 Mounting the measuring device

LWARNING
Danger due to improper process sealing!
‣ Ensure that the inside diameters of the gaskets are greater than or equal to that of the
process connections and piping.
‣ Ensure that the gaskets are clean and undamaged.
‣ Install the gaskets correctly.

1. Ensure that the direction of the arrow on the nameplate of the sensor matches the
flow direction of the fluid.
2. Install the measuring device or turn the transmitter housing so that the cable entries
do not point upwards.


A0029263

6.2.4 Turning the transmitter housing

To provide easier access to the connection compartment or display module, the transmitter
housing can be turned.

4. öf
öf

f ne
f ne

n
n

te r
te r

un
un

Nicht
Nicht

ES
ES C
C
– –

+ +

E E
e
e

ar ar

3 mm 1. 4 mm 3.
2.

A0029993

1. Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.
2. Unscrew the connection compartment cover.
3. Release the fixing screw.
4. Turn the housing to the desired position.
5. Firmly tighten the securing screw.
6. Screw on the connection compartment cover
7. Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

28 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Installation

6.2.5 Turning the display module

The display module can be turned to optimize display readability and operability.

öf
öf

f ne
f ne

n
n

te r
te r

un
un

Nicht
Nicht
ES
ES C
C
– –

+ +
ES
C
E – E

e
e
ar ar

3 mm 1. 3.
2.

A0030035

1. Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.
2. Unscrew the connection compartment cover.
3. Turn the display module to the desired position: max. 8 × 45° in each direction.
4. Screw on the connection compartment cover.
5. Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

6.3 Post-installation check

Is the device undamaged (visual inspection)? 

Does the measuring device conform to the measuring point specifications?

For example:
• Process temperature →  189
• Process pressure (refer to the section on "Pressure-temperature ratings" in the "Technical 
Information" document)
• Ambient temperature
• Measuring range

Has the correct orientation for the sensor been selected ?

• According to sensor type 
• According to medium temperature
• According to medium properties (outgassing, with entrained solids)

Does the arrow on the sensor nameplate match the direction of flow of the fluid through the

piping →  23?

Are the measuring point identification and labeling correct (visual inspection)? 

Is the device adequately protected from precipitation and direct sunlight? 

Are the securing screw and securing clamp tightened securely? 

Endress+Hauser 29
Electrical connection Proline Promass E 300 HART

7 Electrical connection
NOTICE
The measuring device does not have an internal circuit breaker.
‣ For this reason, assign the measuring device a switch or power-circuit breaker so that
the power supply line can be easily disconnected from the mains.
‣ Although the measuring device is equipped with a fuse, additional overcurrent
protection (maximum 10 A) should be integrated into the system installation.

7.1 Connection conditions

7.1.1 Required tools

• For cable entries: Use corresponding tools
• For securing clamp: Allen key 3 mm
• Wire stripper
• When using stranded cables: Crimper for wire end ferrule
• For removing cables from terminal: Flat blade screwdriver ≤ 3 mm (0.12 in)

7.1.2 Requirements for connecting cable

The connecting cables provided by the customer must fulfill the following requirements.

Electrical safety
In accordance with applicable federal/national regulations.

Protective ground cable

Cable ≥2.08 mm2 (14 AWG)
The grounding impedance must be less than 1 Ω.

Permitted temperature range

• The installation guidelines that apply in the country of installation must be observed.
• The cables must be suitable for the minimum and maximum temperatures to be
expected.

Power supply cable

Standard installation cable is sufficient.

Signal cable
Current output 4 to 20 mA HART
A shielded cable is recommended. Observe grounding concept of the plant.

Current output 0/4 to 20 mA

Standard installation cable is sufficient.

Pulse/frequency/switch output
Standard installation cable is sufficient.

Double pulse output

Standard installation cable is sufficient.

30 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Electrical connection

Relay output
Standard installation cable is sufficient.

Current input 0/4 to 20 mA

Standard installation cable is sufficient.

Status input
Standard installation cable is sufficient.

Cable diameter
• Cable glands supplied:
M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)
• Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).

Requirements for the connecting cable – Remote display and operating module
DKX001

Optionally available connecting cable

A cable is supplied depending on the order option
• Order code for measuring device: order code 030 for "Display; operation", option O
or
• Order code for measuring device: order code 030 for "Display; operation", option M
and
• Order code for DKX001: order code 040 for "Cable", option A, B, D, E

Standard cable 2 × 2 × 0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) PVC cable with common shield (2 pairs, pair-
stranded)

Flame resistance According to DIN EN 60332-1-2

Oil-resistance According to DIN EN 60811-2-1

Shielding Tin-plated copper-braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %

Capacitance: core/shield ≤200 pF/m

L/R ≤24 µH/Ω

Available cable length 5 m (15 ft)/10 m (35 ft)/20 m (65 ft)/30 m (100 ft)

Operating temperature When mounted in a fixed position: –50 to +105 °C (–58 to +221 °F); when cable
can move freely: –25 to +105 °C (–13 to +221 °F)

Standard cable - customer-specific cable

No cable is supplied, and it must be provided by the customer (up to max.
300 m (1 000 ft)) for the following order option:
Order code for DKX001: Order code 040 for "Cable", option 1 "None, provided by customer,
max 300 m"
A standard cable can be used as the connecting cable.

Standard cable 4 cores (2 pairs); pair-stranded with common shield

Shielding Tin-plated copper-braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %

Capacitance: core/shield Maximum 1 000 nF for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

L/R Maximum 24 µH/Ω for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

Cable length Maximum 300 m (1 000 ft), see the following table

Endress+Hauser 31
Electrical connection Proline Promass E 300 HART

Max. cable length for use in

Non-hazardous area,
Cross-section
Ex Zone 2, Class I, Division 2
Ex Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) 80 m (270 ft)

0.50 mm2 (20 AWG) 120 m (400 ft)

0.75 mm2 (18 AWG) 180 m (600 ft)

1.00 mm2 (17 AWG) 240 m (800 ft)

1.50 mm2 (15 AWG) 300 m (1 000 ft)

32 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Electrical connection

7.1.3 Terminal assignment

Transmitter: supply voltage, input/outputs

The terminal assignment of the inputs and outputs depends on the individual order
version of the device. The device-specific terminal assignment is documented on an
adhesive label in the terminal cover.

Supply voltage Input/output 1 Input/output 2 Input/output 3

1 (+) 2 (–) 26 (+) 27 (–) 24 (+) 25 (–) 22 (+) 23 (–)

Device-specific terminal assignment: adhesive label in terminal cover.

Terminal assignment of the remote display and operating module →  36.

7.1.4 Preparing the measuring device

NOTICE
Insufficient sealing of the housing!
Operational reliability of the measuring device could be compromised.
‣ Use suitable cable glands corresponding to the degree of protection.
1. Remove dummy plug if present.
2. If the measuring device is supplied without cable glands:
Provide suitable cable gland for corresponding connecting cable.
3. If the measuring device is supplied with cable glands:
Observe requirements for connecting cables →  30.

7.2 Connecting the measuring device

NOTICE
Limitation of electrical safety due to incorrect connection!
‣ Have electrical connection work carried out by appropriately trained specialists only.
‣ Observe applicable federal/national installation codes and regulations.
‣ Comply with local workplace safety regulations.
‣ Always connect the protective ground cable  before connecting additional cables.
‣ For use in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the information in the device-
specific Ex documentation.

7.2.1 Connecting the transmitter

1
2
3
4

A0026781

1 Terminal connection for supply voltage

2 Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output
3 Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output or terminal connection for network connection via
service interface (CDI-RJ45); optional: connection for external WLAN antenna or remote display and
operating module DKX001
4 Protective earth (PE)

Endress+Hauser 33
Electrical connection Proline Promass E 300 HART

3.

öf
öf

f ne
f ne

n
n

te r
ter

un
un

Nicht
Nicht
ES
ES C
C
– –

+ +

E E

ES
C
–

e
e
ar + ar

4. E

3 mm 1. 3.
2.

A0029813

1. Loosen the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

2. Unscrew the connection compartment cover.
3. Squeeze the tabs of the display module holder together.
4. Remove the display module holder.

Ni Ni
Spcht Pow Spcht Pow
an un an un
Do nu te er Do nu te er
en no ngr en no ngr
öf

öf
er t op öf
f ne

er t op öf

f ne
Ne gize fn Ne gize fn
so pa den when so pa den when
n

n
us s ou er us s ou
tens vr en tens vr en
ionir Powr en ionir
te fn n
un g öf whe
te r

te r
I/O ichtnnun en I/O
un

un
Npa t op

6. S noze d vrir
Doergis ouion
Nicht

Nicht
ene patens
N us
so
I/O
e

e
ar ar

ES ES
C C
– –

+ +

E E

5.

A0029814

5. Attach the holder to the edge of the electronics compartment.

6. Open the terminal cover.

8.
7. 10 (0.4)
öf
f ne
n
ter
un
Nicht

mm (in)
e

ar

ES
C
–

9. E

A0029815

7. Push the cable through the cable entry . To ensure tight sealing, do not remove the
sealing ring from the cable entry.
8. Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, also fit ferrules.
9. Connect the protective ground.

34 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Electrical connection

11.

öf
f ne
n
22 mm

te r
un
Nicht
24 mm

e
ar

ES
C
–

10.

A0029816

10. Connect the cable in accordance with the terminal assignment .

 Signal cable terminal assignment: The device-specific terminal assignment is
documented on an adhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage terminal assignment: Adhesive label in the terminal cover or
→  33.
11. Firmly tighten the cable glands.
 This concludes the cable connection process.
12. Close the terminal cover.
13. Fit the display module holder in the electronics compartment.
14. Screw on the connection compartment cover.
15. Secure the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

Removing a cable

3 (0.12)

1.

2.

A0029598

8 Engineering unit mm (in)

1. To remove a cable from the terminal, use a flat-blade screwdriver to push the slot
between the two terminal holes
2. while simultaneously pulling the cable end out of the terminal.

Endress+Hauser 35
Electrical connection Proline Promass E 300 HART

7.2.2 Connecting the remote display and operating module DKX001

The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra
→  170.
• The remote display and operating module DKX001 is only available for the
following housing version: order code for "Housing": option A "Aluminum, coated"
• The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote
display and operating module DKX001 is ordered directly with the measuring
device. Display or operation at the transmitter is not possible in this case.
• If ordered subsequently, the remote display and operating module DKX001 may not
be connected at the same time as the existing measuring device display module.
Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any one
time.

Gnd
Vcc
A B
81 82 83 84
1
2

3
81 82 83 84
4

Gnd
A B
5 Vcc

A0027518

1 Remote display and operating module DKX001

2 Protective earth (PE)
3 Connecting cable
4 Measuring device
5 Protective earth (PE)

7.3 Ensuring potential equalization

7.3.1 Requirements
No special measures for potential equalization are required.

36 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Electrical connection

7.4 Special connection instructions

7.4.1 Connection examples

Current output 4 to 20 mA HART

1 2 3
4...20 mA

4 5
A0029055

9 Connection example for 4 to 20 mA HART current output (active)

1 Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
2 Cable shield provided at one end. The cable shield must be grounded at both ends to comply with EMC
requirements; observe cable specifications
3 Connection for HART operating devices →  62
4 Resistor for HART communication (≥ 250 Ω): observe maximum load →  177
5 Analog display unit: observe maximum load →  177
6 Transmitter

1 2 3 4

4...20 mA

A0028762

 10 Connection example for 4 to 20 mA HART current output (passive)

1 Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
2 Power supply
3 Cable shield provided at one end. The cable shield must be grounded at both ends to comply with EMC
requirements; observe cable specifications
4 Analog display unit: observe maximum load →  177
5 Transmitter

Endress+Hauser 37
Electrical connection Proline Promass E 300 HART

HART input

1 2 3 4

4...20 mA

2 3
A0028763

 11 Connection example for HART input with a common negative (passive)

1 Automation system with HART output (e.g. PLC)
2 Active barrier for power supply (e.g. RN221N)
3 Cable shield provided at one end. The cable shield must be grounded at both ends to comply with EMC
requirements; observe cable specifications
4 Analog display unit: observe maximum load →  177
5 Pressure measuring device (e.g. Cerabar M, Cerabar S): see requirements
6 Transmitter

Current output 4-20 mA

1 2

3
4...20 mA
A0028758

 12 Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (active)

1 Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
2 Analog display unit: observe maximum load →  177
3 Transmitter

1 2 3

4
4...20 mA

A0028759

 13 Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (passive)

1 Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
2 Active barrier for power supply (e.g. RN221N)
3 Analog display unit: observe maximum load →  177
4 Transmitter

38 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Electrical connection

Pulse/frequency output

1 2

12345
A0028761

 14 Connection example for pulse/frequency output (passive)

1 Automation system with pulse/frequency input (e.g. PLC)
2 Power supply
3 Transmitter: Observe input values →  179

Switch output

1 2

A0028760

 15 Connection example for switch output (passive)

1 Automation system with switch input (e.g. PLC)
2 Power supply
3 Transmitter: Observe input values →  179

Double pulse output

1 3

4
A0029280

 16 Connection example for double pulse output (active)

1 Automation system with double pulse input (e.g. PLC)
2 Transmitter: Observe input values →  180
3 Double pulse output
4 Double pulse output (slave), phase-shifted

Endress+Hauser 39
Electrical connection Proline Promass E 300 HART

2
1 4

5
A0029279

 17 Connection example for double pulse output (passive)

1 Automation system with double pulse input (e.g. PLC)
2 Power supply
3 Transmitter: Observe input values →  180
4 Double pulse output
5 Double pulse output (slave), phase-shifted

Relay output

1 2

A0028760

 18 Connection example for relay output (passive)

1 Automation system with relay input (e.g. PLC)
2 Power supply
3 Transmitter: Observe input values →  181

Current input

1 2 3

A0028915

 19 Connection example for 4 to 20 mA current input

1 Power supply
2 Terminal box
3 External measuring device (to read in pressure or temperature, for instance)
4 Transmitter

40 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Electrical connection

Status input

1 2

A0028764

 20 Connection example for status input

1 Automation system with status output (e.g. PLC)
2 Power supply
3 Transmitter

7.5 Ensuring the degree of protection

The measuring device fulfills all the requirements for the IP66/67 degree of protection,
Type 4X enclosure.

To guarantee IP66/67 degree of protection, Type 4X enclosure, carry out the following
steps after the electrical connection:
1. Check that the housing seals are clean and fitted correctly.
2. Dry, clean or replace the seals if necessary.
3. Tighten all housing screws and screw covers.
4. Firmly tighten the cable glands.
5. To ensure that moisture does not enter the cable entry:
Route the cable so that it loops down before the cable entry ("water trap").


A0029278

6. Insert dummy plugs into unused cable entries.

7.6 Post-connection check

Are cables or the device undamaged (visual inspection)? 

Do the cables used meet the requirements? 

Do the cables have adequate strain relief? 

Are all the cable glands installed, firmly tightened and leak-tight? Cable run with "water trap"

→  41?

If supply voltage is present, do values appear on the display module? 

Endress+Hauser 41
Operation options Proline Promass E 300 HART

8 Operation options

8.1 Overview of operation options

ESC

- + E

1 2 3 4 5 6
A0034513

1 Local operation via display module

2 Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS
Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM)
3 Field Xpert SFX350 or SFX370
4 Field Xpert SMT70
5 Mobile handheld terminal
6 Control system (e.g. PLC)

42 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation options

8.2 Structure and function of the operating menu

8.2.1 Structure of the operating menu

For an overview of the operating menu for experts: "Description of Device Parameters"
document supplied with the device→  203

Operating menu for operators and maintenances

Language !
Operatation Language

Parameter 1
Operator

Parameter n

Submenu 1

Submenu n

Setup Device tag

Wizard 1 / Parameter 1
Maintenance

Task-oriented
Wizard n / Parameter n

Advanced setup Enter access code

Parameter 1

Parameter n

Submenu 1

Submenu n

Diagnostics Parameter 1

Parameter n

Submenu 1

Submenu n

Operating menu for experts

Expert Access status display

Parameter n

System
Function-oriented

Sensor
Expert

Input

Output

Communication

Application

Diagnostics

A0018237-EN

 21 Schematic structure of the operating menu

Endress+Hauser 43
Operation options Proline Promass E 300 HART

8.2.2 Operating philosophy

The individual parts of the operating menu are assigned to certain user roles (operator,
maintenance etc.). Each user role contains typical tasks within the device lifecycle.

Menu/parameter User role and tasks Content/meaning

Language task-oriented Role "Operator", "Maintenance" • Defining the operating language

Tasks during operation: • Defining the Web server operating language
• Configuring the operational • Resetting and controlling totalizers
display
Operation • Reading measured values • Configuring the operational display (e.g. display format, display contrast)
• Resetting and controlling totalizers

Setup "Maintenance" role Wizards for fast commissioning:

Commissioning: • Setting the system units
• Configuration of the • Configuration of the communication interface
measurement • Defining the medium
• Configuration of the inputs and • Displaying the I/O/configuration
outputs • Configuring the inputs
• Configuration of the • Configuring the outputs
communication interface • Configuration of the operational display
• Setting the low flow cut off
• Configuring partial and empty pipe detection
Advanced setup
• For more customized configuration of the measurement (adaptation to
special measuring conditions)
• Configuration of totalizers
• Configuring the WLAN settings
• Administration (define access code, reset measuring device)

Diagnostics "Maintenance" role Contains all parameters for error detection and analyzing process and device
Fault elimination: errors:
• Diagnostics and elimination of • Diagnostic list
process and device errors Contains up to 5 currently pending diagnostic messages.
• Measured value simulation • Event logbook
Contains event messages that have occurred.
• Device information
Contains information for identifying the device.
• Measured values
Contains all current measured values.
• Data logging submenu with "Extended HistoROM" order option
Storage and visualization of measured values
• Heartbeat
The functionality of the device is checked on demand and the verification
results are documented.
• Simulation
Is used to simulate measured values or output values.

Expert function-oriented Tasks that require detailed Contains all the parameters of the device and makes it possible to access
knowledge of the function of the these parameters directly using an access code. The structure of this menu is
device: based on the function blocks of the device:
• Commissioning measurements • System
under difficult conditions Contains all higher-order device parameters which do not concern the
• Optimal adaptation of the measurement or the communication interface.
measurement to difficult • Sensor
conditions Configuration of the measurement.
• Detailed configuration of the • Input
communication interface Configuration of the status input.
• Error diagnostics in difficult cases • Output
Configuration of the analog current outputs as well as the pulse/frequency
and switch output.
• Communication
Configuration of the digital communication interface and the Web server.
• Application
Configuration of the functions that go beyond the actual measurement
(e.g. totalizer).
• Diagnostics
Error detection and analysis of process and device errors and for device
simulation and Heartbeat Technology.

44 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation options

8.3 Access to the operating menu via the local display

8.3.1 Operational display

2 XXXXXXXXX F 3

4 1120.50
kg/h

A0029348

1 Operational display
2 Device tag
3 Status area
4 Display area for measured values (4-line)
5 Operating elements→  50

Status area
The following symbols appear in the status area of the operational display at the top right:
• Status signals→  147
• F: Failure
• C: Function check
• S: Out of specification
• M: Maintenance required
• Diagnostic behavior→  148
• : Alarm
• : Warning
• : Locking (the device is locked via the hardware )
• : Communication (communication via remote operation is active)

Display area
In the display area, each measured value is prefaced by certain symbol types for further
description:

Measured variable Measurement channel Diagnostic behavior

number

↓ ↓ ↓

Example

Appears only if a diagnostics

event is present for this
measured variable.

Measured values
Symbol Meaning

Mass flow

• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow

Endress+Hauser 45
Operation options Proline Promass E 300 HART

• Density
• Reference density

Temperature

Totalizer

 displayed.
The measurement channel number indicates which of the three totalizers is

Output

 The measurement channel number indicates which of the outputs is displayed.

Status input

Measurement channel numbers

Symbol Meaning

Measurement channel 1 to 4

The measurement channel number is displayed only if more than one channel is present for the same measured
variable type (e.g. Totalizer 1 to 3).

Diagnostic behavior
The diagnostic behavior pertains to a diagnostic event that is relevant to the displayed measured variable.
For information on the symbols →  148

The number and display format of the measured values can be configured via the
Format display parameter (→  105).

8.3.2 Navigation view

In the submenu In the wizard

1 1

2 /../Operation 0091-1 3 2 /../Select medium 3

Access stat.disp Select medium
Operator Liquid
Locking status 4
Display 4

5 5

A0013993-EN A0013995-EN

1 Navigation view
2 Navigation path to current position
3 Status area
4 Display area for navigation
5 Operating elements →  50

Navigation path
The navigation path - displayed at the top left in the navigation view - consists of the
following elements:

46 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation options

• In the submenu: Omission symbol for Name of current

Display symbol for menu operating menu levels in • Submenu
• In the wizard: between • Wizard
Display symbol for wizard • Parameters

↓ ↓ ↓

Examples / ../ Display

/ ../ Display

For more information about the icons in the menu, refer to the "Display area" section
→  47

Status area
The following appears in the status area of the navigation view in the top right corner:
• In the submenu
• The direct access code for the parameter you are navigating to (e.g. 0022-1)
• If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal
• In the wizard
If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal
• For information on the diagnostic behavior and status signal →  147
• For information on the function and entry of the direct access code →  52

Display area

Menus
Symbol Meaning

Operation
Appears:
• In the menu next to the "Operation" selection
• At the left in the navigation path in the Operation menu

Setup
Appears:
• In the menu next to the "Setup" selection
• At the left in the navigation path in the Setup menu

Diagnostics
Appears:
• In the menu next to the "Diagnostics" selection
• At the left in the navigation path in the Diagnostics menu

Expert
Appears:
• In the menu next to the "Expert" selection
• At the left in the navigation path in the Expert menu

Submenus, wizards, parameters

Symbol Meaning

Submenu

Wizard

Parameters within a wizard

 No display symbol exists for parameters in submenus.

Endress+Hauser 47
Operation options Proline Promass E 300 HART

Locking
Symbol Meaning

Parameter locked
When displayed in front of a parameter name, indicates that the parameter is locked.
• By a user-specific access code
• By the hardware write protection switch

Wizard operation
Symbol Meaning

Switches to the previous parameter.

Confirms the parameter value and switches to the next parameter.

Opens the editing view of the parameter.

8.3.3 Editing view

Numeric editor

1 +0.000 Xx
0 1 2 3 4
2 5 6 7 8 9
+ –
3

A0034250

 22 For entering values in parameters (e.g. limit values)

1 Entry display area
2 Input screen
3 Confirm, delete or reject entry
4 Operating elements

48 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation options

Text editor

1 Xxxxxxx
A B C D E F G H I J K
2 L M N O P Q R S T U V W
X Y Z 6
3 7

5
4

A0034114

 23 For entering text in parameters (e.g. tag name)

1 Entry display area
2 Current input screen
3 Change input screen
4 Operating elements
5 Move entry position
6 Delete entry
7 Reject or confirm entry

Using the operating elements in the editing view

Operating key(s) Meaning

Minus key
Move the entry position to the left.

Plus key
Move the entry position to the right.

Enter key
• Press the key briefly: confirm your selection.
• Press the key for 2 s: confirm the entry.

+ Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)

Close the editing view without accepting the changes.

Input screens

Symbol Meaning

Upper case

Lower case

Numbers

Punctuation marks and special characters: = + – * / ² ³ ¼ ½ ¾ ( ) [ ] < > { }

Punctuation marks and special characters: ' " `^. , ; : ? ! % µ ° € $ £ ¥ § @ # / \ I ~ & _

Umlauts and accents

Endress+Hauser 49
Operation options Proline Promass E 300 HART

Controlling data entries

Symbol Meaning

Move entry position

Reject entry

Confirm entry

Delete character immediately to the left of the entry position

Delete character immediately to the right of the entry position

Clear all the characters entered

8.3.4 Operating elements

Operating key(s) Meaning

Minus key
In a menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar upwards in a picklist.
With a Wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the previous parameter.
With a text and numeric editor
Move the entry position to the left.

Plus key
In a menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar downwards in a picklist.
With a Wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the next parameter.
With a text and numeric editor
Move the entry position to the right.

Enter key
For operational display
Pressing the key briefly opens the operating menu.
In a menu, submenu
• Pressing the key briefly:
• Opens the selected menu, submenu or parameter.
• Starts the wizard.
• If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
• Pressing the key for 2 s for parameter:
If present, opens the help text for the function of the parameter.
With a Wizard
Opens the editing view of the parameter.
With a text and numeric editor
• Press the key briefly: confirm your selection.
• Press the key for 2 s: confirm the entry.

50 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation options

Operating key(s) Meaning

Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)

In a menu, submenu
• Pressing the key briefly:
• Exits the current menu level and takes you to the next higher level.
• If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
+
• Pressing the key for 2 s returns you to the operational display ("home position").
With a Wizard
Exits the wizard and takes you to the next higher level.
With a text and numeric editor
Close the editing view without accepting the changes.

Minus/Enter key combination (press the keys simultaneously)

• If the keypad lock is active:
+ Press the key for 3 s: deactivate the keypad lock.
• If the keypad lock is not active:
Press the key for 3 s: the context menu opens along with the option for activating the
keypad lock.

8.3.5 Opening the context menu

Using the context menu, the user can call up the following menus quickly and directly from
the operational display:
• Setup
• Data backup
• Simulation

Calling up and closing the context menu

The user is in the operational display.
1. Press the  and  keys for longer than 3 seconds.
 The context menu opens.

XXXXXXXXXX
Setup
Conf.backup
Simulation
Keylock on
l/h
A0034608-EN

2. Press  +  simultaneously.
 The context menu is closed and the operational display appears.

Calling up the menu via the context menu

1. Open the context menu.
2. Press  to navigate to the desired menu.
3. Press  to confirm the selection.
 The selected menu opens.

Endress+Hauser 51
Operation options Proline Promass E 300 HART

8.3.6 Navigating and selecting from list

Different operating elements are used to navigate through the operating menu. The
navigation path is displayed on the left in the header. Icons are displayed in front of the
individual menus. These icons are also shown in the header during navigation.
For an explanation of the navigation view with symbols and operating elements
→  46
Example: Setting the number of displayed measured values to "2 values"

XXXXXXXXX

20.50
Main menu 0104-1
Language
1. English
Display/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Language
2. Display/operat.

Setup
/ ../Display/operat. 0091-1
Access stat.disp
3. Operator
Locking status
Display
/ ../Display/operat.
Locking status
4. Display

/ ../Display 0098-1
Format display
5. 1 value, max.
Contrast display
Display intervall
/ ../Format display 0098-1
1 value, max.
6. Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.
/ ../Format display 0098-1
1 value, max.
7. Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.
XXXXXXXXX
10.50
8. 2s mA
2800
Hz

A0029562-EN

8.3.7 Calling the parameter directly

A parameter number is assigned to every parameter to be able to access a parameter
directly via the onsite display. Entering this access code in the Direct access parameter
calls up the desired parameter directly.
Navigation path
Expert → Direct access

52 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation options

The direct access code consists of a 5-digit number (at maximum) and the channel
number, which identifies the channel of a process variable: e.g. 00914-2. In the navigation
view, this appears on the right-hand side in the header of the selected parameter.

00914-2 1

A0029414

1 Direct access code

Note the following when entering the direct access code:

• The leading zeros in the direct access code do not have to be entered.
Example: Enter "914" instead of "00914"
• If no channel number is entered, channel 1 is accessed automatically.
Example: Enter 00914 → Assign process variable parameter
• If a different channel is accessed: Enter the direct access code with the corresponding
channel number.
Example: Enter 00914-2 → Assign process variable parameter
For the direct access codes of the individual parameters, see the "Description of Device
Parameters" document for the device

8.3.8 Calling up help text

Help text is available for some parameters and can be called up from the navigation view.
The help text provides a brief explanation of the parameter function and thereby supports
swift and safe commissioning.

Calling up and closing the help text

The user is in the navigation view and the selection bar is on a parameter.
1. Press  for 2 s.
 The help text for the selected parameter opens.

Ent. access code

Enter access code to disable
write protec.

A0014002-EN

 24 Example: Help text for parameter "Enter access code"

2. Press  +  simultaneously.
 The help text is closed.

8.3.9 Changing the parameters

Parameters can be changed via the numeric editor or text editor.
• Numeric editor: Change values in a parameter, e.g. specifications for limit values.
• Text editor: Enter text in a parameter, e.g. tag name.
A message is displayed if the value entered is outside the permitted value range.

Endress+Hauser 53
Operation options Proline Promass E 300 HART

Ent. access code

Invalid or out of range input
value
Min:0
Max:9999
A0014049-EN

For a description of the editing view - consisting of the text editor and numeric editor
- with symbols →  48, for a description of the operating elements →  50

8.3.10 User roles and related access authorization

The two user roles "Operator" and "Maintenance" have different write access to the
parameters if the customer defines a user-specific access code. This protects the device
configuration via the local display from unauthorized access →  128.

Defining access authorization for user roles

An access code is not yet defined when the device is delivered from the factory. Access
authorization (read and write access) to the device is not restricted and corresponds to the
"Maintenance" user role.
‣ Define the access code.
 The "Operator" user role is redefined in addition to the "Maintenance" user role.
Access authorization differs for the two user roles.

Access authorization to parameters: "Maintenance" user role

Access code status Read access Write access

An access code has not yet been defined

 
(factory setting).
1)
After an access code has been defined.  

1) The user only has write access after entering the access code.

Access authorization to parameters: "Operator" user role

Access code status Read access Write access

After an access code has been defined.  –– 1)

1) Despite the defined access code, certain parameters can always be modified and thus are excepted from
the write protection, as they do not affect the measurement. Refer to the "Write protection via access code"
section

The user role with which the user is currently logged on is indicated by the Access
status parameter. Navigation path: Operation → Access status

8.3.11 Disabling write protection via access code

If the -symbol appears on the local display in front of a parameter, the parameter is
write-protected by a user-specific access code and its value cannot be changed at the
moment using local operation →  128.

Parameter write protection via local operation can be disabled by entering the user-specific
access code in the Enter access code parameter (→  111) via the respective access
option.
1. After you press , the input prompt for the access code appears.

54 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation options

2. Enter the access code.

 The -symbol in front of the parameters disappears; all previously write-
protected parameters are now re-enabled.

8.3.12 Enabling and disabling the keypad lock

The keypad lock makes it possible to block access to the entire operating menu via local
operation. As a result, it is no longer possible to navigate through the operating menu or
change the values of individual parameters. Users can only read the measured values on
the operational display.
The keypad lock is switched on and off via the context menu.

Switching on the keypad lock

The keypad lock is switched on automatically:
• If the device has not been operated via the display for > 1 minute.
• Each time the device is restarted.

To activate the keylock manually:

1. The device is in the measured value display.
Press the  and  keys for 3 seconds.
 A context menu appears.
2. In the context menu select the Keylock on option.
 The keypad lock is switched on.

If the user attempts to access the operating menu while the keypad lock is active, the
Keylock on message appears.

Switching off the keypad lock

‣ The keypad lock is switched on.
Press the  and  keys for 3 seconds.
 The keypad lock is switched off.

8.4 Access to the operating menu via the Web browser

8.4.1 Function range

Thanks to the integrated Web server, the device can be operated and configured via a Web
browser and via a service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via a WLAN interface. The structure of
the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values,
status information on the device is also displayed and allows the user to monitor the status
of the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters
can be configured.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication by
computer or a mobile handheld terminal.
For additional information on the Web server, refer to the Special Documentation for
the device →  204

Endress+Hauser 55
Operation options Proline Promass E 300 HART

8.4.2 Prerequisites
Computer hardware
Hardware Interface

CDI-RJ45 WLAN

Interface The computer must have an RJ45 The operating unit must have a
interface. WLAN interface.

Connection Standard Ethernet cable with RJ45 Connection via Wireless LAN.
connector.

Screen Recommended size: ≥12" (depends on the screen resolution)

Computer software
Software Interface

CDI-RJ45 WLAN

Recommended operating • Microsoft Windows 7 or higher.

systems • Mobile operating systems:
• iOS
• Android

 Microsoft Windows XP is supported.

Web browsers supported • Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or higher
• Microsoft Edge
• Mozilla Firefox
• Google Chrome
• Safari

Computer settings
Settings Interface

CDI-RJ45 WLAN

User rights Appropriate user rights (e.g. administrator rights) for TCP/IP and proxy server
settings are necessary (for adjusting the IP address, subnet mask etc.).

Proxy server settings of the The Web browser setting Use a Proxy Server for Your LAN must be
Web browser deselected .

JavaScript JavaScript must be enabled.

 Ifenter
JavaScript cannot be enabled:
http://192.168.1.212/basic.html in the address line of the Web
browser. A fully functional but simplified version of the operating menu
structure starts in the Web browser.

 When installing a new firmware version: To enable correct data display,

clear the temporary memory (cache) of the Web browser under Internet
options.

Network connections Only the active network connections to the measuring device should be used.

Switch off all other network Switch off all other network
connections such as WLAN. connections.

In the event of connection problems: →  144

56 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation options

Measuring device: Via CDI-RJ45 service interface

Device CDI-RJ45 service interface

Measuring device The measuring device has an RJ45 interface.

Web server Web server must be enabled; factory setting: ON

 For information on enabling the Web server →  61

Measuring device: via WLAN interface

Device WLAN interface

Measuring device The measuring device has a WLAN antenna:

• Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna
• Transmitter with external WLAN antenna

Web server Web server and WLAN must be enabled; factory setting: ON

 For information on enabling the Web server →  61

8.4.3 Establishing a connection

Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

Preparing the measuring device
1. Depending on the housing version:
Release the securing clamp or securing screw of the housing cover.
2. Depending on the housing version:
Unscrew or open the housing cover.
3. The location of the connection socket depends on the measuring device and the
communication protocol:
Connect the computer to the RJ45 connector via the standard Ethernet connecting
cable .

Configuring the Internet protocol of the computer

The following information refers to the default Ethernet settings of the device.
IP address of the device: 192.168.1.212 (factory setting)

1. Switch on the measuring device.

2. Connect to the computer using a cable →  63.
3. If a 2nd network card is not used, close all the applications on the notebook.
 Applications requiring Internet or a network, such as e-mail, SAP applications,
Internet or Windows Explorer.
4. Close any open Internet browsers.
5. Configure the properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) as defined in the table:

IP address 192.168.1.XXX; for XXX all numerical sequences except: 0, 212 and 255 → e.g.
192.168.1.213

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

Default gateway 192.168.1.212 or leave cells empty

Endress+Hauser 57
Operation options Proline Promass E 300 HART

Via WLAN interface

Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal
NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.
NOTICE
In principle, avoid simultaneous access to the measuring device via the service
interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface from the same mobile terminal. This
could cause a network conflict.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 service interface or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).

Preparing the mobile terminal

‣ Enable WLAN reception on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1. In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promass_300_A802000).
2. If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.
3. Enter the password: serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g.
L100A802000).
 LED on display module flashes: it is now possible to operate the measuring device
with the Web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.

The serial number can be found on the nameplate.

To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring
point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign
the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as
the WLAN network.

Disconnecting
‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the operating unit and measuring device.

Starting the Web browser

1. Start the Web browser on the computer.

58 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation options

2. Enter the IP address of the Web server in the address line of the Web browser:
192.168.1.212
 The login page appears.

1 2 3 4 5

7
8

10

A0029417

1 Picture of device
2 Device name
3 Device tag (→  79)
4 Status signal
5 Current measured values
6 Operating language
7 User role
8 Access code
9 Login
10 Reset access code (→  124)

If a login page does not appear, or if the page is incomplete →  144

8.4.4 Logging on
1. Select the preferred operating language for the Web browser.
2. Enter the user-specific access code.
3. Press OK to confirm your entry.

Access code 0000 (factory setting); can be changed by customer

If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to

the login page.

Endress+Hauser 59
Operation options Proline Promass E 300 HART

8.4.5 User interface

1
2

A0029418

1 Function row
2 Local display language
3 Navigation area

Header
The following information appears in the header:
• Device name
• Device tag
• Device status with status signal →  150
• Current measured values

Function row

Functions Meaning

Measured values Displays the measured values of the measuring device

• Access to the operating menu from the measuring device

• The structure of the operating menu is the same as for the local display
Menu
 For detailed information on the structure of the operating menu, see the Operating
Instructions for the measuring device

Device status Displays the diagnostic messages currently pending, listed in order of priority

Data exchange between PC and measuring device:

• Device configuration:
• Load settings from the device
(XML format, save configuration)
• Save settings to the device
(XML format, restore configuration)
Data
• Logbook - Export Event logbook (.csv file)
management
• Documents - Export documents:
• Export backup data record
(.csv file, create documentation of the measuring point configuration)
• Verification report
(PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat Verification" application package)
• Firmware update - Flashing a firmware version

Configuration and checking of all the parameters required for establishing the connection
Network to the measuring device:
configuration • Network settings (e.g. IP address, MAC address)
• Device information (e.g. serial number, firmware version)

Logout End the operation and call up the login page

Navigation area
If a function is selected in the function bar, the submenus of the function open in the
navigation area. The user can now navigate through the menu structure.

60 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation options

Working area
Depending on the selected function and the related submenus, various actions can be
performed in this area:
• Configuring parameters
• Reading measured values
• Calling up help text
• Starting an upload/download

8.4.6 Disabling the Web server

The Web server of the measuring device can be switched on and off as required using the
Web server functionality parameter.

Navigation
"Expert" menu → Communication → Web server

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description Selection Factory setting

Web server functionality Switch the Web server on and off. • Off On
• HTML Off
• On

Function scope of the "Web server functionality" parameter

Option Description

Off • The web server is completely disabled.

• Port 80 is locked.

On • The complete functionality of the web server is available.

• JavaScript is used.
• The password is transferred in an encrypted state.
• Any change to the password is also transferred in an encrypted state.

Enabling the Web server

If the Web server is disabled it can only be re-enabled with the Web server functionality
parameter via the following operating options:
• Via local display
• Via Bedientool "FieldCare"
• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool

8.4.7 Logging out

Before logging out, perform a data backup via the Data management function
(upload configuration from device) if necessary.

1. Select the Logout entry in the function row.

 The home page with the Login box appears.
2. Close the Web browser.
3. If no longer needed:
Reset modified properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) →  57.

Endress+Hauser 61
Operation options Proline Promass E 300 HART

8.5 Access to the operating menu via the operating tool

The structure of the operating menu in the operating tools is the same as for operation via
the local display.

8.5.1 Connecting the operating tool

Via HART protocol

This communication interface is available in device versions with a HART output.

4 7

1 2 3 5 6
A0028747

 25 Options for remote operation via HART protocol (active)

1 Control system (e.g. PLC)
2 Field Communicator 475
3 Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) for access to the integrated device Web server or
computer with an operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM) with COM
DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
4 Commubox FXA195 (USB)
5 Field Xpert SFX350 or SFX370
6 Field Xpert SMT70
7 VIATOR Bluetooth modem with connecting cable
8 Transmitter

62 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation options

10

2 3 6 9

1 4 5 7 8
A0028746

 26 Options for remote operation via HART protocol (passive)

1 Control system (e.g. PLC)
2 Transmitter power supply unit, e.g. RN221N (with communication resistor)
3 Connection for Commubox FXA195 and Field Communicator 475
4 Field Communicator 475
5 Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) for access to the integrated device Web server or
computer with an operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM) with COM
DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
6 Commubox FXA195 (USB)
7 Field Xpert SFX350 or SFX370
8 Field Xpert SMT70
9 VIATOR Bluetooth modem with connecting cable
10 Transmitter

Service interface
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)
A point-to-point connection can be established to configure the device onsite. With the
housing open, the connection is established directly via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) of
the device.
An adapter for RJ45 and the M12 connector is optionally available:
Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)"
The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 connector mounted
in the cable entry. Therefore the connection to the service interface can be established
via an M12 connector without opening the device.

A0027563

 27 Connection via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

1 Computer with Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for accessing the integrated
device Web server or with "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
2 Standard Ethernet connecting cable with RJ45 connector
3 Service interface (CDI-RJ45) of the measuring device with access to the integrated Web server

Endress+Hauser 63
Operation options Proline Promass E 300 HART

Via WLAN interface

The optional WLAN interface is available on the following device version:
Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch control + WLAN"

3 4 1 2 3 4

5 6 7
A0034570

1 Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna

2 Transmitter with external WLAN antenna
3 LED lit constantly: WLAN reception is enabled on measuring device
4 LED flashing: WLAN connection established between operating unit and measuring device
5 Computer with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for
accessing the integrated device Web server or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare)
6 Mobile handheld terminal with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft
Edge) for accessing the integrated device Web server or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare)
7 Smart phone or tablet (e.g. Field Xpert SMT70)

Function WLAN: IEEE 802.11 b/g (2.4 GHz)

Encryption WPA2-PSK AES-128 (in accordance with IEEE 802.11i)

Configurable WLAN channels 1 to 11

Degree of protection IP67

Available antennas • Internal antenna

• External antenna (optional)
In the event of poor transmission/reception conditions at the place of
installation.

 Only one antenna active in each case!

Range • Internal antenna: typically 10 m (32 ft)
• External antenna: typically 50 m (164 ft)

Materials (external antenna) • Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylic ester-styrene-acrylonitrile) and nickel-
plated brass
• Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass
• Cable: Polyethylene
• Connector: Nickel-plated brass
• Angle bracket: Stainless steel

Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal

NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.

64 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation options

NOTICE
In principle, avoid simultaneous access to the measuring device via the service
interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface from the same mobile terminal. This
could cause a network conflict.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 service interface or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).

Preparing the mobile terminal

‣ Enable WLAN reception on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1. In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promass_300_A802000).
2. If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.
3. Enter the password: serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g.
L100A802000).
 LED on display module flashes: it is now possible to operate the measuring device
with the Web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.

The serial number can be found on the nameplate.

To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring
point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign
the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as
the WLAN network.

Disconnecting
‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the operating unit and measuring device.

8.5.2 Field Xpert SFX350, SFX370

Function range
Field Xpert SFX350 and Field Xpert SFX370 are mobile computers for commissioning and
maintenance. They enable efficient device configuration and diagnostics for HART and
FOUNDATION Fieldbus devices in the non-hazardous area (SFX350, SFX370) and
hazardous area (SFX370).
For details, see Operating Instructions BA01202S

Source for device description files

See information →  69

8.5.3 FieldCare

Function scope
FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser. It can configure all smart
field devices in a system and helps you manage them. By using the status information, it is
also a simple but effective way of checking their status and condition.

Endress+Hauser 65
Operation options Proline Promass E 300 HART

Access is via:
• HART protocol
• CDI-RJ45 service interface →  63
• WLAN interface→  64
Typical functions:
• Configuring parameters of transmitters
• Loading and saving device data (upload/download)
• Documentation of the measuring point
• Visualization of the measured value memory (line recorder) and event logbook
For additional information about FieldCare, see Operating Instructions BA00027S
and BA00059S

Source for device description files

See information →  69

Establishing a connection
1. Start FieldCare and launch the project.
2. In the network: Add a device.
 The Add device window opens.
3. Select the CDI Communication TCP/IP option from the list and press OK to confirm.
4. Right-click CDI Communication TCP/IP and select the Add device option in the
context menu that opens.
5. Select the desired device from the list and press OK to confirm.
 The CDI Communication TCP/IP (Configuration) window opens.
6. Enter the device address in the IP address field: 192.168.1.212 and press Enter to
confirm.
7. Establish the online connection to the device.

For additional information, see Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S

66 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation options

User interface

2 3 4 5 6 7

Xxxxxx/…/…/
Device name: Xxxxxxx Mass flow: 12.34 kg/h
Device tag: Xxxxxxx
1 Volume flow: 12.34 m³/h
Status: Good

Xxxxxx Mass flow unit: kg/h

PAccess status tooling Maintenance Volume flow unit: m³/h
+ Operation
– Setup
PDevice tag Xxxxxx
– System units
P Mass flow unit kg/h
8 P Volume flow unit m³/h
9
+ Select medium
+ …
+ …
+ Advanced setup
+ Diagnostics
+ Expert

10 11
A0021051-EN

1 Header
2 Picture of device
3 Device name
4 Device tag
5 Status area with status signal→  150
6 Display area for current measured values
7 Edit toolbar with additional functions such as save/restore, event list and create documentation
8 Navigation area with operating menu structure
9 Working area
10 Range of action
11 Status area

8.5.4 DeviceCare

Function scope
Tool to connect and configure Endress+Hauser field devices.
The fastest way to configure Endress+Hauser field devices is with the dedicated
"DeviceCare" tool. Together with the device type managers (DTMs) it presents a convenient,
comprehensive solution.
For details, see Innovation Brochure IN01047S

Source for device description files

See information →  69

8.5.5 AMS Device Manager

Function scope
Program from Emerson Process Management for operating and configuring measuring
devices via HART protocol.

Endress+Hauser 67
Operation options Proline Promass E 300 HART

Source for device description files

See data →  69

8.5.6 SIMATIC PDM

Function scope
SIMATIC PDM is a standardized, manufacturer-independent program from Siemens for
the operation, configuration, maintenance and diagnosis of intelligent field devices via
HART protocol.

Source for device description files

See data →  69

8.5.7 Field Communicator 475

Function scope
Industrial handheld terminal from Emerson Process Management for remote
configuration and measured value display via HART protocol.

Source for device description files

See data →  69

68 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART System integration

9 System integration

9.1 Overview of device description files

9.1.1 Current version data for the device

Firmware version 01.05.zz • On the title page of the Operating Instructions

• On the transmitter nameplate
• Firmware version
Diagnostics → Device information → Firmware
version

Release date of firmware version 08.2019 ---

Manufacturer ID 0x11 Manufacturer ID

Diagnostics → Device information → Manufacturer ID

Device type ID 0x3B Device type

Diagnostics → Device information → Device type

HART protocol revision 7 ---

Device revision 1 • On the transmitter nameplate

• Device revision
Diagnostics → Device information → Device revision

For an overview of the different firmware versions for the device →  164

9.1.2 Operating tools

The suitable device description file for the individual operating tools is listed in the table
below, along with information on where the file can be acquired.

Operating tool via Sources for obtaining device descriptions

HART protocol

FieldCare • www.endress.com → Download Area

• CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser)
• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)

DeviceCare • www.endress.com → Download Area

• CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser)
• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)

• Field Xpert SFX350 Use update function of handheld terminal

• Field Xpert SFX370

AMS Device Manager www.endress.com → Download Area

(Emerson Process Management)

SIMATIC PDM www.endress.com → Download Area

(Siemens)

Field Communicator 475 Use update function of handheld terminal

(Emerson Process Management)

Endress+Hauser 69
System integration Proline Promass E 300 HART

9.2 Measured variables via HART protocol

The following measured variables (HART device variables) are assigned to the dynamic
variables at the factory:

Dynamic variables Measured variables (HART device variables)

Primary dynamic variable (PV) Mass flow

Secondary dynamic variable (SV) Totalizer 1

Tertiary dynamic variable (TV) Density

Quaternary dynamic variable (QV) Temperature

The assignment of the measured variables to the dynamic variables can be modified and
assigned as desired via local operation and the operating tool using the following
parameters:
• Expert → Communication → HART output → Output → Assign PV
• Expert → Communication → HART output → Output → Assign SV
• Expert → Communication → HART output → Output → Assign TV
• Expert → Communication → HART output → Output → Assign QV
The following measured variables can be assigned to the dynamic variables:

70 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART System integration

Measured variables for PV (primary dynamic variable)

• Measured variables which are generally available:
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Temperature
• Electronic temperature
• Oscillation frequency 0
• Frequency fluctuation 0
• Oscillation damping 0
• Oscillation damping fluctuation 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0
• Pressure 1)
• Additional measured variables with the Heartbeat Verification + Monitoring application
package:
• Carrier pipe temperature 1)
• Oscillation frequency 1
• Oscillation amplitude
• Oscillation amplitude 1
• Frequency fluctuation 1
• Oscillation damping 1
• Oscillation damping fluctuation 1
• Exciter current 1
• HBSI
• Additional measured variables with the Concentration application package:
• Concentration
• Target mass flow
• Carrier mass flow
• Target volume flow
• Carrier volume flow
• Target corrected volume flow
• Carrier corrected volume flow
• Additional measured variables with the Petroleum application package:
• Reference density alternative
• GSV flow
• GSV flow alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Water cut
• Oil density
• Water density
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Oil corrected volume flow
• Water corrected volume flow

1) Visible depending on the order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser 71
System integration Proline Promass E 300 HART

Measured variables for SV, TV, QV (secondary, tertiary and quaternary dynamic
variable)
• Measured variables which are always available:
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Temperature
• Electronic temperature
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Additional measured variables with the Heartbeat Verification + Monitoring application
package:
• Carrier pipe temperature
• HBSI
• Additional measured variables with the Concentration application package:
• Concentration
• Target mass flow
• Carrier mass flow
• Target volume flow
• Carrier volume flow
• Target corrected volume flow
• Carrier corrected volume flow
• Additional measured variables with the Petroleum application package:
• Reference density alternative
• GSV flow
• GSV flow alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Water cut
• Oil density
• Water density
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Oil corrected volume flow
• Water corrected volume flow
• Weighted density average
• Weighted temperature average

9.2.1 Device variables

Device variables are permanently assigned. A maximum of eight device variables can be
transmitted.

Assignment Device variables

0 Mass flow

1 Volume flow

2 Corrected volume flow

3 Density

4 Reference density

5 Temperature

72 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART System integration

Assignment Device variables

6 Totalizer 1

7 Totalizer 2

8 Totalizer 3

13 Target mass flow 1)

14 Carrier mass flow 1)

15 Concentration 1)

1) Visible depending on the order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser 73
System integration Proline Promass E 300 HART

9.3 Other settings

Burst mode functionality in accordance with HART 7 Specification:

Navigation
"Expert" menu → Communication → HART output → Burst configuration → Burst
configuration 1 to n

‣ Burst configuration

‣ Burst configuration 1 to n

Burst mode 1 to n →  74

Burst command 1 to n →  74

Burst variable 0 →  75

Burst variable 1 →  75

Burst variable 2 →  75

Burst variable 3 →  75

Burst variable 4 →  75

Burst variable 5 →  75

Burst variable 6 →  75

Burst variable 7 →  75

Burst trigger mode →  75

Burst trigger level →  76

Min. update period →  76

Max. update period →  76

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description Selection / User entry Factory setting

Burst mode 1 to n Activate the HART burst mode for burst • Off Off
message X. • On

Burst command 1 to n Select the HART command that is sent to the • Command 1 Command 2
HART master. • Command 2
• Command 3
• Command 9
• Command 33
• Command 48

74 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART System integration

Parameter Description Selection / User entry Factory setting

Burst variable 0 For HART command 9 and 33: select the • Mass flow Volume flow
HART device variable or the process variable. • Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow *
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Density
• Reference density *
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• HBSI *
• HART input
• Percent of range
• Measured current
• Primary variable (PV)
• Secondary variable (SV)
• Tertiary variable (TV)
• Quaternary variable (QV)
• Not used
• Target volume flow *
• Carrier volume flow *
• Target corrected volume
flow *
• Carrier corrected volume
flow *
• Reference density
alternative *
• GSV flow *
• GSV flow alternative *
• NSV flow *
• NSV flow alternative *
• S&W volume flow *
• Water cut *
• Oil density *
• Water density *
• Oil mass flow *
• Water mass flow *
• Oil volume flow *
• Water volume flow *
• Oil corrected volume flow *
• Water corrected volume
flow *

Burst variable 1 For HART command 9 and 33: select the See the Burst variable 0 Not used
HART device variable or the process variable. parameter.

Burst variable 2 For HART command 9 and 33: select the See the Burst variable 0 Not used
HART device variable or the process variable. parameter.

Burst variable 3 For HART command 9 and 33: select the See the Burst variable 0 Not used
HART device variable or the process variable. parameter.

Burst variable 4 For HART command 9: select the HART See the Burst variable 0 Not used
device variable or the process variable. parameter.

Burst variable 5 For HART command 9: select the HART See the Burst variable 0 Not used
device variable or the process variable. parameter.

Burst variable 6 For HART command 9: select the HART See the Burst variable 0 Not used
device variable or the process variable. parameter.

Burst variable 7 For HART command 9: select the HART See the Burst variable 0 Not used
device variable or the process variable. parameter.

Burst trigger mode Select the event that triggers burst message • Continuous Continuous
X. • Window *
• Rising *
• Falling *
• On change

Endress+Hauser 75
System integration Proline Promass E 300 HART

Parameter Description Selection / User entry Factory setting

Burst trigger level Enter the burst trigger value. Signed floating-point number –
Together with the option selected in the
Burst trigger mode parameter the burst
trigger value determines the time of burst
message X.

Min. update period Enter the minimum time span between two Positive integer 1 000 ms
burst commands of burst message X.

Max. update period Enter the maximum time span between two Positive integer 2 000 ms
burst commands of burst message X.

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

76 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

10 Commissioning

10.1 Function check

Before commissioning the measuring device:
‣ Make sure that the post-installation and post-connection checks have been performed.
• "Post-installation check" checklist→  29
• "Post-connection check" checklist →  41

10.2 Switching on the measuring device

‣ After a successful function check, switch on the measuring device.
 After a successful startup, the local display switches automatically from the startup
display to the operational display.

If nothing appears on the local display or a diagnostic message is displayed, refer to

the section on "Diagnostics and troubleshooting" →  143.

10.3 Setting the operating language

Factory setting: English or ordered local language

XXXXXXXXX

20.50
XX XX
Main menu 0104-1
1. Display language
English
Operation
Setup
Display language 0104-1
2. Ã English
Deutsch
Español
Français
Display language 0104-1
3. Ã English
Deutsch
Español
Français
Hauptmenü 0104-1
4. Sprache
Deutsch
Betrieb
Setup

A0029420

 28 Taking the example of the local display

10.4 Configuring the measuring device

• The Setup menu with its guided wizards contains all the parameters needed for standard
operation.
• Navigation to the Setup menu

Endress+Hauser 77
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

XXXXXXXXX

20.50
mA
Main menu 0104-1
Display language
1. English
Display/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Display/operat.
2. Setup

Diagnostic
/ ../Setup
Medium selection
3.
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX

A0032222-EN

 29 Taking the example of the local display

The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version.
Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the
Operation Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation
for the device (→ "Supplementary documentation" section).

 Setup

Device tag →  79

‣ System units →  79

‣ Medium selection →  82

‣ I/O configuration →  83

‣ Current input 1 to n →  84

‣ Status input 1 to n →  86

‣ Current output 1 to n →  86

‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output →  90
1 to n

‣ Relay output 1 to n →  99

‣ Double pulse output →  102

‣ Display →  103

‣ Low flow cut off →  108

78 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

‣ Partially filled pipe detection →  109

‣ Advanced setup →  110

10.4.1 Defining the tag name

To enable fast identification of the measuring point within the system, you can enter a
unique designation using the Device tag parameter and thus change the factory setting.

1 XXXXXXXXX

A0029422

 30 Header of the operational display with tag name

1 Tag name

Enter the tag name in the "FieldCare" operating tool →  67

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Device tag

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User entry Factory setting

Device tag Enter the name for the measuring point. Max. 32 characters, such as Promass
letters, numbers or special
characters (e.g. @, %, /).

10.4.2 Setting the system units

In the System units submenu the units of all the measured values can be set.
The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version.
Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the
Operation Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation
for the device (→ "Supplementary documentation" section).

Navigation
"Setup" menu → System units

‣ System units

Mass flow unit →  80

Mass unit →  80

Volume flow unit →  80

Volume unit →  80

Endress+Hauser 79
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Corrected volume flow unit →  80

Corrected volume unit →  80

Density unit →  80

Reference density unit →  80

Temperature unit →  81

Pressure unit →  81

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description Selection Factory setting

Mass flow unit Select mass flow unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:
• kg/h
Result
• lb/min
The selected unit applies for:
• Output
• Low flow cut off
• Simulation process variable

Mass unit Select mass unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:

• kg
• lb

Volume flow unit Select volume flow unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:
• l/h
Result
• gal/min (us)
The selected unit applies for:
• Output
• Low flow cut off
• Simulation process variable

Volume unit Select volume unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:

• l (DN > 150 (6"): m³)
• gal (us)

Corrected volume flow unit Select corrected volume flow unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:
• Nl/h
Result
• Sft³/min
The selected unit applies for:
Corrected volume flow parameter
(→  132)

Corrected volume unit Select corrected volume unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:
• Nl
• Sft³

Density unit Select density unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:

• kg/l
Result
• lb/ft³
The selected unit applies for:
• Output
• Simulation process variable
• Density adjustment (Expert menu)

Reference density unit Select reference density unit. Unit choose list Country-dependent
• kg/Nl
• lb/Sft³

80 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameter Description Selection Factory setting

Temperature unit Select temperature unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:

• °C
Result
• °F
The selected unit applies for:
• Electronic temperature parameter
(6053)
• Maximum value parameter (6051)
• Minimum value parameter (6052)
• External temperature parameter (6080)
• Maximum value parameter (6108)
• Minimum value parameter (6109)
• Carrier pipe temperature parameter
(6027)
• Maximum value parameter (6029)
• Minimum value parameter (6030)
• Reference temperature parameter
(1816)
• Temperature parameter

Pressure unit Select process pressure unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:
• bar a
Result
• psi a
The unit is taken from:
• Pressure value parameter (→  83)
• External pressure parameter
(→  83)
• Pressure value

Endress+Hauser 81
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

10.4.3 Selecting and setting the medium

The Select medium wizard submenu contains parameters that must be configured in
order to select and set the medium.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Select medium

‣ Medium selection

Select medium →  83

Select gas type →  83

Reference sound velocity →  83

Temperature coefficient sound velocity →  83

Pressure compensation →  83

Pressure value →  83

External pressure →  83

82 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry / User
interface

Select medium – Select medium type. • Liquid Liquid

• Gas

Select gas type The Gas option is selected in Select measured gas type. • Air Methane CH4
the Select medium parameter. • Ammonia NH3
• Argon Ar
• Sulfur hexafluoride
SF6
• Oxygen O2
• Ozone O3
• Nitrogen oxide
NOx
• Nitrogen N2
• Nitrous oxide N2O
• Methane CH4
• Hydrogen H2
• Helium He
• Hydrogen chloride
HCl
• Hydrogen sulfide
H2S
• Ethylene C2H4
• Carbon dioxide
CO2
• Carbon monoxide
CO
• Chlorine Cl2
• Butane C4H10
• Propane C3H8
• Propylene C3H6
• Ethane C2H6
• Others

Reference sound velocity In the Select gas type Enter sound velocity of gas at 1 to 99 999.9999 m/ 415.0 m/s
parameter, the Others option 0 °C (32 °F). s
is selected.

Temperature coefficient sound The Others option is selected Enter temperature coefficient Positive floating- 0 (m/s)/K
velocity in the Select gas type for the gas sound velocity. point number
parameter.

Pressure compensation – Select pressure compensation • Off Off

type. • Fixed value
• External value *
• Current input 1 *
• Current input 2 *

Pressure value The Fixed value option or the Enter process pressure to be Positive floating- 1.01325 bar
Current input 1…n option is used for pressure correction. point number
selected in the Pressure
compensation parameter.

External pressure The Fixed value option or the Shows the external process Positive floating- 1.01325 bar
Current input 1…n option is pressure value. point number
selected in the Pressure
compensation parameter.

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.4.4 Displaying the I/O configuration

The I/O configuration submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters
in which the configuration of the I/O modules is displayed.

Endress+Hauser 83
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Navigation
"Setup" menu → I/O configuration

‣ I/O configuration

I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers →  84

I/O module 1 to n information →  84

I/O module 1 to n type →  84

Apply I/O configuration →  84

I/O alteration code →  84

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface / Selection / Factory setting

User entry

I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers Shows the terminal numbers used by the I/O • Not used –
module. • 26-27 (I/O 1)
• 24-25 (I/O 2)
• 22-23 (I/O 3)

I/O module 1 to n information Shows information of the plugged I/O • Not plugged –
module. • Invalid
• Not configurable
• Configurable
• HART

I/O module 1 to n type Shows the I/O module type. • Off Off
• Current output *
• Current input *
• Status input *
• Pulse/frequency/switch
output *
• Double pulse output *
• Relay output *

Apply I/O configuration Apply parameterization of the freely • No No

configurable I/O module. • Yes

I/O alteration code Enter the code in order to change the I/O Positive integer 0
configuration.

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.4.5 Configuring the current input

The "Current input" wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters that
have to be set for configuring the current input.

84 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Current input

‣ Current input 1 to n

Terminal number →  85

Signal mode →  85

0/4 mA value →  85

20 mA value →  85

Current span →  85

Failure mode →  85

Failure value →  85

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface / Factory setting

Selection / User
entry

Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers • Not used –

used by the current input • 24-25 (I/O 2)
module. • 22-23 (I/O 3)

Signal mode The measuring device is not Select the signal mode for the • Passive Active
approved for use in the current input. • Active *
hazardous area with type of
protection Ex-i.

0/4 mA value – Enter 4 mA value. Signed floating-point 0

number

20 mA value – Enter 20 mA value. Signed floating-point Depends on country

number and nominal
diameter

Current span – Select current range for • 4...20 mA (4... Country-specific:

process value output and 20.5 mA) • 4...20 mA NAMUR
upper/lower level for alarm • 4...20 mA NAMUR (3.8...20.5 mA)
signal. (3.8...20.5 mA) • 4...20 mA US
• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8 mA)
(3.9...20.8 mA)
• 0...20 mA (0...
20.5 mA)

Failure mode – Define input behavior in alarm • Alarm Alarm

condition. • Last valid value
• Defined value

Failure value In the Failure mode Enter value to be used by the Signed floating-point 0
parameter, the Defined value device if input value from number
option is selected. external device is missing.

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser 85
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

10.4.6 Configuring the status input

The Status input submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters that
have to be set for configuring the status input.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Status input

‣ Status input 1 to n

Assign status input →  86

Terminal number →  86

Active level →  86

Terminal number →  86

Response time status input →  86

Terminal number →  86

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface / Selection / Factory setting

User entry

Terminal number Shows the terminal numbers used by the • Not used –
status input module. • 24-25 (I/O 2)
• 22-23 (I/O 3)

Assign status input Select function for the status input. • Off Off
• Reset totalizer 1
• Reset totalizer 2
• Reset totalizer 3
• Reset all totalizers
• Flow override
• Zero point adjustment

Active level Define input signal level at which the • High High
assigned function is triggered. • Low

Response time status input Define the minimum amount of time the 5 to 200 ms 50 ms
input signal level must be present before the
selected function is triggered.

10.4.7 Configuring the current output

The Current output wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that have
to be set for configuring the current output.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Current output

‣ Current output 1 to n

Terminal number →  87

86 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Signal mode →  87

Assign current output 1 to n →  88

Current span →  89

0/4 mA value →  89

20 mA value →  89

Fixed current →  89

Damping output 1 to n →  89

Failure mode →  89

Failure current →  89

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface / Factory setting

Selection / User
entry

Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers • Not used –

used by the current output • 26-27 (I/O 1)
module. • 24-25 (I/O 2)
• 22-23 (I/O 3)

Signal mode – Select the signal mode for the • Active * Active
current output. • Passive *

Endress+Hauser 87
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface / Factory setting

Selection / User
entry

Assign current output 1 to n – Select process variable for • Off * Mass flow
current output. • Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow *
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow *
• Carrier volume
flow *
• Target corrected
volume flow *
• Carrier corrected
volume flow *
• Density
• Reference density *
• Reference density
alternative *
• GSV flow *
• GSV flow
alternative *
• NSV flow *
• NSV flow
alternative *
• S&W volume flow *
• Water cut *
• Oil density *
• Water density *
• Oil mass flow *
• Water mass flow *
• Oil volume flow *
• Water volume
flow *
• Oil corrected
volume flow *
• Water corrected
volume flow *
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Electronic
temperature
• Oscillation
frequency 0
• Oscillation
amplitude 0 *
• Frequency
fluctuation 0 *
• Oscillation
damping 0 *
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0 *
• Signal asymmetry *
• Exciter current 0 *
• HBSI *
• Pressure *
• Application
specific output 0 *
• Application
specific output 1 *
• Index
inhomogeneous
medium
• Index suspended
bubbles *

88 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface / Factory setting

Selection / User
entry

Current span – Select current range for • 4...20 mA NAMUR Country-specific:

process value output and (3.8...20.5 mA) • 4...20 mA NAMUR
upper/lower level for alarm • 4...20 mA US (3.8...20.5 mA)
signal. (3.9...20.8 mA) • 4...20 mA US
• 4...20 mA (4... (3.9...20.8 mA)
20.5 mA)
• 0...20 mA (0...
20.5 mA)
• Fixed current

0/4 mA value In the Current span parameter Enter 4 mA value. Signed floating-point Country-specific:
(→  89), one of the number • 0 kg/h
following options is selected: • 0 lb/min
• 4...20 mA NAMUR
(3.8...20.5 mA)
• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)
• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)
• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)

20 mA value One of the following options is Enter 20 mA value. Signed floating-point Depends on country
selected in the Current span number and nominal
parameter (→  89): diameter
• 4...20 mA NAMUR
(3.8...20.5 mA)
• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)
• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)
• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)

Fixed current The Fixed current option is Defines the fixed output 0 to 22.5 mA 22.5 mA
selected in the Current span current.
parameter (→  89).

Damping output 1 to n A process variable is selected Set reaction time for output 0.0 to 999.9 s 1.0 s
in the Assign current output signal to fluctuations in the
parameter (→  88) and one measured value.
of the following options is
selected in the Current span
parameter (→  89):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR
(3.8...20.5 mA)
• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)
• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)
• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)

Failure mode A process variable is selected Define output behavior in • Min. Max.
in the Assign current output alarm condition. • Max.
parameter (→  88) and one • Last valid value
of the following options is • Actual value
selected in the Current span • Defined value
parameter (→  89):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR
(3.8...20.5 mA)
• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)
• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)
• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)

Failure current The Defined value option is Enter current output value in 0 to 22.5 mA 22.5 mA
selected in the Failure mode alarm condition.
parameter.

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser 89
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

10.4.8 Configuring the pulse/frequency/switch output

The Pulse/frequency/switch output wizard guides you systematically through all the
parameters that can be set for configuring the selected output type.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Pulse/frequency/switch output

‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n

Operating mode →  90

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description Selection Factory setting

Operating mode Define the output as a pulse, frequency or • Pulse Pulse

switch output. • Frequency
• Switch

Configuring the pulse output

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output

‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n

Operating mode →  91

Terminal number →  91

Signal mode →  91

Assign pulse output →  91

Value per pulse →  91

Pulse width →  91

Failure mode →  92

Invert output signal →  92

90 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Operating mode – Define the output as a pulse, • Pulse Pulse

frequency or switch output. • Frequency
• Switch

Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers • Not used –

used by the PFS output • 24-25 (I/O 2)
module. • 22-23 (I/O 3)

Signal mode – Select the signal mode for the • Passive Passive
PFS output. • Active
• Passive NAMUR

Assign pulse output 1 to n The Pulse option is selected in Select process variable for • Off Off
the Operating mode pulse output. • Mass flow
parameter parameter. • Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow *
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow *
• Carrier volume
flow *
• Target corrected
volume flow *
• Carrier corrected
volume flow *
• GSV flow *
• GSV flow
alternative *
• NSV flow *
• NSV flow
alternative *
• S&W volume flow *
• Oil mass flow *
• Water mass flow *
• Oil volume flow *
• Water volume
flow *
• Oil corrected
volume flow *
• Water corrected
volume flow *

Pulse scaling The Pulse option is selected in Enter quantity for measured Positive floating Depends on country
the Operating mode value at which a pulse is point number and nominal
parameter (→  90) and a output. diameter
process variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  91).

Pulse width The Pulse option is selected in Define time width of the 0.05 to 2 000 ms 100 ms
the Operating mode output pulse.
parameter (→  90) and a
process variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  91).

Endress+Hauser 91
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Failure mode The Pulse option is selected in Define output behavior in • Actual value No pulses
the Operating mode alarm condition. • No pulses
parameter (→  90) and a
process variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  91).

Invert output signal – Invert the output signal. • No No

• Yes

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Configuring the frequency output

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output

‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n

Operating mode →  93

Terminal number →  93

Signal mode →  93

Assign frequency output →  94

Minimum frequency value →  95

Maximum frequency value →  95

Measuring value at minimum →  95

frequency

Measuring value at maximum →  95

frequency

Failure mode →  95

Failure frequency →  95

Invert output signal →  95

92 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Operating mode – Define the output as a pulse, • Pulse Pulse

frequency or switch output. • Frequency
• Switch

Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers • Not used –

used by the PFS output • 24-25 (I/O 2)
module. • 22-23 (I/O 3)

Signal mode – Select the signal mode for the • Passive Passive
PFS output. • Active
• Passive NAMUR

Endress+Hauser 93
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Assign frequency output The Frequency option is Select process variable for • Off Off
selected in the Operating frequency output. • Mass flow
mode parameter (→  90). • Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow *
• Carrier volume
flow *
• Target corrected
volume flow *
• Carrier corrected
volume flow *
• Density
• Reference density
• Reference density
alternative *
• GSV flow *
• GSV flow
alternative *
• NSV flow *
• NSV flow
alternative *
• S&W volume flow *
• Water cut *
• Oil density *
• Water density *
• Oil mass flow *
• Water mass flow *
• Oil volume flow *
• Water volume
flow *
• Oil corrected
volume flow *
• Water corrected
volume flow *
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Electronic
temperature
• Oscillation
frequency 0
• Oscillation
amplitude 0 *
• Frequency
fluctuation 0 *
• Oscillation
damping 0 *
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0 *
• Signal asymmetry *
• Exciter current 0 *
• HBSI *
• Pressure
• Application
specific output 0 *
• Application
specific output 1 *
• Index
inhomogeneous
medium
• Index suspended
bubbles *

94 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Minimum frequency value The Frequency option is Enter minimum frequency. 0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  90)
and a process variable is
selected in the Assign
frequency output parameter
(→  94).

Maximum frequency value The Frequency option is Enter maximum frequency. 0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz 10 000.0 Hz
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  90)
and a process variable is
selected in the Assign
frequency output parameter
(→  94).

Measuring value at minimum The Frequency option is Enter measured value for Signed floating-point Depends on country
frequency selected in the Operating minmum frequency. number and nominal
mode parameter (→  90) diameter
and a process variable is
selected in the Assign
frequency output parameter
(→  94).

Measuring value at maximum The Frequency option is Enter measured value for Signed floating-point Depends on country
frequency selected in the Operating maximum frequency. number and nominal
mode parameter (→  90) diameter
and a process variable is
selected in the Assign
frequency output parameter
(→  94).

Failure mode The Frequency option is Define output behavior in • Actual value 0 Hz
selected in the Operating alarm condition. • Defined value
mode parameter (→  90) • 0 Hz
and a process variable is
selected in the Assign
frequency output parameter
(→  94).

Failure frequency The Frequency option is Enter frequency output value 0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
selected in the Operating in alarm condition.
mode parameter (→  90)
and a process variable is
selected in the Assign
frequency output parameter
(→  94).

Invert output signal – Invert the output signal. • No No

• Yes

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser 95
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Configuring the switch output

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output

‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n

Operating mode →  96

Terminal number →  96

Signal mode →  96

Switch output function →  97

Assign diagnostic behavior →  97

Assign limit →  98

Assign flow direction check →  98

Assign status →  99

Switch-on value →  99

Switch-off value →  99

Switch-on delay →  99

Switch-off delay →  99

Failure mode →  99

Invert output signal →  99

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Operating mode – Define the output as a pulse, • Pulse Pulse

frequency or switch output. • Frequency
• Switch

Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers • Not used –

used by the PFS output • 24-25 (I/O 2)
module. • 22-23 (I/O 3)

Signal mode – Select the signal mode for the • Passive Passive
PFS output. • Active
• Passive NAMUR

96 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Switch output function The Switch option is selected Select function for switch • Off Off
in the Operating mode output. • On
parameter. • Diagnostic
behavior
• Limit
• Flow direction
check
• Status

Assign diagnostic behavior • In the Operating mode Select diagnostic behavior for • Alarm Alarm
parameter, the Switch switch output. • Alarm or warning
option is selected. • Warning
• In the Switch output
function parameter, the
Diagnostic behavior option
is selected.

Endress+Hauser 97
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Assign limit • The Switch option is Select process variable for limit • Mass flow Mass flow
selected in the Operating function. • Volume flow
mode parameter. • Corrected volume
• The Limit option is selected flow *
in the Switch output • Target mass flow *
function parameter. • Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow *
• Carrier volume
flow *
• Target corrected
volume flow *
• Carrier corrected
volume flow *
• Density
• Reference density *
• Reference density
alternative *
• GSV flow *
• GSV flow
alternative *
• NSV flow *
• NSV flow
alternative *
• S&W volume flow *
• Water cut *
• Oil density *
• Water density *
• Oil mass flow *
• Water mass flow *
• Oil volume flow *
• Water volume
flow *
• Oil corrected
volume flow *
• Water corrected
volume flow *
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Oscillation
damping
• Pressure
• Application
specific output 0 *
• Application
specific output 1 *
• Index
inhomogeneous
medium
• Index suspended
bubbles *

Assign flow direction check • The Switch option is Select process variable for flow • Off Mass flow
selected in the Operating direction monitoring. • Volume flow
mode parameter. • Mass flow
• The Flow direction check • Corrected volume
option is selected in the flow *
Switch output function
parameter.

98 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Assign status • The Switch option is Select device status for switch • Partially filled pipe Partially filled pipe
selected in the Operating output. detection detection
mode parameter. • Low flow cut off
• The Status option is
selected in the Switch
output function parameter.

Switch-on value • The Switch option is Enter measured value for the Signed floating-point Country-specific:
selected in the Operating switch-on point. number • 0 kg/h
mode parameter. • 0 lb/min
• The Limit option is selected
in the Switch output
function parameter.

Switch-off value • The Switch option is Enter measured value for the Signed floating-point Country-specific:
selected in the Operating switch-off point. number • 0 kg/h
mode parameter. • 0 lb/min
• The Limit option is selected
in the Switch output
function parameter.

Switch-on delay • The Switch option is Define delay for the switch-on 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.0 s
selected in the Operating of status output.
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selected
in the Switch output
function parameter.

Switch-off delay • The Switch option is Define delay for the switch-off 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.0 s
selected in the Operating of status output.
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selected
in the Switch output
function parameter.

Failure mode – Define output behavior in • Actual status Open

alarm condition. • Open
• Closed

Invert output signal – Invert the output signal. • No No

• Yes

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.4.9 Configuring the relay output

The Relay output wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters that
have to be set for configuring the relay output.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Relay output 1 to n

‣ RelaisOutput 1 to n

Switch output function →  100

Assign flow direction check →  100

Assign limit →  101

Assign diagnostic behavior →  101

Endress+Hauser 99
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Assign status →  101

Switch-off value →  101

Switch-on value →  102

Failure mode →  102

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Relay output function – Select the function for the • Closed Closed
relay output. • Open
• Diagnostic
behavior
• Limit
• Flow direction
check
• Digital Output

Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers • Not used –

used by the relay output • 24-25 (I/O 2)
module. • 22-23 (I/O 3)

Assign flow direction check In the Relay output function Select process variable for flow • Off Mass flow
parameter, the Flow direction direction monitoring. • Volume flow
check option is selected. • Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow *

100 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Assign limit The Limit option is selected in Select process variable for limit • Mass flow Mass flow
the Relay output function function. • Volume flow
parameter. • Corrected volume
flow *
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow *
• Carrier volume
flow *
• Target corrected
volume flow *
• Carrier corrected
volume flow *
• Density
• Reference density *
• Reference density
alternative *
• GSV flow *
• GSV flow
alternative *
• NSV flow *
• NSV flow
alternative *
• S&W volume flow *
• Water cut *
• Oil density *
• Water density *
• Oil mass flow *
• Water mass flow *
• Oil volume flow *
• Water volume
flow *
• Oil corrected
volume flow *
• Water corrected
volume flow *
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Oscillation
damping
• Pressure
• Application
specific output 0 *
• Application
specific output 1 *
• Index
inhomogeneous
medium
• Index suspended
bubbles *

Assign diagnostic behavior In the Relay output function Select diagnostic behavior for • Alarm Alarm
parameter, the Diagnostic switch output. • Alarm or warning
behavior option is selected. • Warning

Assign status In the Relay output function Select device status for switch • Partially filled pipe Partially filled pipe
parameter, the Digital Output output. detection detection
option is selected. • Low flow cut off

Switch-off value In the Relay output function Enter measured value for the Signed floating-point Country-specific:
parameter, the Limit option is switch-off point. number • 0 kg/h
selected. • 0 lb/min

Endress+Hauser 101
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Switch-off delay In the Relay output function Define delay for the switch-off 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.0 s
parameter, the Limit option is of status output.
selected.

Switch-on value The Limit option is selected in Enter measured value for the Signed floating-point Country-specific:
the Relay output function switch-on point. number • 0 kg/h
parameter. • 0 lb/min

Switch-on delay In the Relay output function Define delay for the switch-on 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.0 s
parameter, the Limit option is of status output.
selected.

Failure mode – Define output behavior in • Actual status Open

alarm condition. • Open
• Closed

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.4.10 Configuring the double pulse output

The Double pulse output submenu guides the user systematically through all the
parameters that have to be set for configuring the double pulse output.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Double pulse output

‣ Double pulse output

Master terminal number →  103

Slave terminal number →  103

Signal mode →  103

Assign pulse output 1 →  103

Measuring mode →  103

Value per pulse →  103

Pulse width →  103

Failure mode →  103

Invert output signal →  103

102 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description Selection / User interface / Factory setting

User entry

Signal mode Select the signal mode for the double pulse • Passive Passive
output. • Active
• Passive NAMUR

Master terminal number Shows the terminal numbers used by the • Not used –
master of the double pulse output module. • 24-25 (I/O 2)
• 22-23 (I/O 3)

Slave terminal number Shows the terminal numbers used by the • Not used –
slave of the double pulse output module. • 24-25 (I/O 2)
• 22-23 (I/O 3)

Assign pulse output 1 Select process variable for pulse output. • Off Off
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow *
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume flow *
• Carrier volume flow *
• Target corrected volume
flow *
• Carrier corrected volume
flow *
• GSV flow *
• GSV flow alternative *
• NSV flow *
• NSV flow alternative *
• S&W volume flow *
• Oil mass flow *
• Water mass flow *
• Oil volume flow *
• Water volume flow *
• Oil corrected volume flow *
• Water corrected volume
flow *

Measuring mode Select measuring mode for pulse output. • Forward flow Forward flow
• Forward/Reverse flow
• Reverse flow
• Reverse flow compensation

Value per pulse Enter measured value at which a pulse is Signed floating-point number Depends on country and
output. nominal diameter

Pulse width Define time width of the output pulse. 0.5 to 2 000 ms 0.5 ms

Failure mode Define output behavior in alarm condition. • Actual value No pulses
• No pulses

Invert output signal Invert the output signal. • No No

• Yes

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.4.11 Configuring the local display

The Display wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that can
configured for configuring the local display.

Endress+Hauser 103
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Display

‣ Display

Format display →  105

Value 1 display →  106

0% bargraph value 1 →  107

100% bargraph value 1 →  107

Value 2 display →  107

Value 3 display →  107

0% bargraph value 3 →  107

100% bargraph value 3 →  107

Value 4 display →  107

104 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Format display A local display is provided. Select how measured values • 1 value, max. size 1 value, max. size
are shown on the display. • 1 bargraph + 1
value
• 2 values
• 1 value large + 2
values
• 4 values

Endress+Hauser 105
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Value 1 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that • Mass flow Mass flow
is shown on the local display. • Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow *
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow *
• Carrier volume
flow *
• Target corrected
volume flow *
• Carrier corrected
volume flow *
• Density
• Reference density *
• Reference density
alternative *
• GSV flow *
• GSV flow
alternative *
• NSV flow *
• NSV flow
alternative *
• S&W volume flow *
• Water cut *
• Oil density *
• Water density *
• Oil mass flow *
• Water mass flow *
• Oil volume flow *
• Water volume
flow *
• Oil corrected
volume flow *
• Water corrected
volume flow *
• Weighted density
average *
• Weighted
temperature
average *
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Electronic
temperature
• Oscillation
frequency 0
• Oscillation
amplitude 0 *
• Frequency
fluctuation 0 *
• Oscillation
damping 0 *
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0 *
• Signal asymmetry *
• Exciter current 0 *
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Current output 1 *
• Current output 2 *
• Current output 3 *
• Pressure
• Application
specific output 1 *

106 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry
• Index
inhomogeneous
medium
• Application
specific output 0 *
• Index suspended
bubbles *

0% bargraph value 1 A local display is provided. Enter 0% value for bar graph Signed floating-point Country-specific:
display. number • 0 kg/h
• 0 lb/min

100% bargraph value 1 A local display is provided. Enter 100% value for bar Signed floating-point Depends on country
graph display. number and nominal
diameter

Value 2 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that For the picklist, see None
is shown on the local display. the Value 2 display
parameter
(→  107)

Value 3 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that For the picklist, see None
is shown on the local display. the Value 2 display
parameter
(→  107)

0% bargraph value 3 A selection was made in the Enter 0% value for bar graph Signed floating-point Country-specific:
Value 3 display parameter. display. number • 0 kg/h
• 0 lb/min

100% bargraph value 3 A selection was made in the Enter 100% value for bar Signed floating-point 0
Value 3 display parameter. graph display. number

Value 4 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that For the picklist, see None
is shown on the local display. the Value 2 display
parameter
(→  107)

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser 107
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

10.4.12 Configuring the low flow cut off

The Low flow cut off wizard systematically guides the user through all the parameters
that must be set to configure low flow cut off.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Low flow cut off

‣ Low flow cut off

Assign process variable →  108

On value low flow cutoff →  108

Off value low flow cutoff →  108

Pressure shock suppression →  108

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Assign process variable – Select process variable for low • Off Mass flow
flow cut off. • Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow *

On value low flow cutoff A process variable is selected Enter on value for low flow cut Positive floating- Depends on country
in the Assign process variable off. point number and nominal
parameter (→  108). diameter

Off value low flow cutoff A process variable is selected Enter off value for low flow cut 0 to 100.0 % 50 %
in the Assign process variable off.
parameter (→  108).

Pressure shock suppression A process variable is selected Enter time frame for signal 0 to 100 s 0s
in the Assign process variable suppression (= active pressure
parameter (→  108). shock suppression).

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

108 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

10.4.13 Configuring the partial filled pipe detection

The Partial filled pipe detection wizard guides you systematically through all parameters
that have to be set for configuring the monitoring of the pipe filling.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Partially filled pipe detection

‣ Partially filled pipe detection

Assign process variable →  109

Low value partial filled pipe detection →  109

High value partial filled pipe detection →  109

Response time part. filled pipe detect. →  109

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Assign process variable – Select process variable for • Off Off

partially filled pipe detection. • Density
• Reference density

Low value partial filled pipe A process variable is selected Enter lower limit value for Signed floating-point 200
detection in the Assign process variable deactivating partialy filled pipe number
parameter (→  109). detection.

High value partial filled pipe A process variable is selected Enter upper limit value for Signed floating-point 6 000
detection in the Assign process variable deactivating partialy filled pipe number
parameter (→  109). detection.

Response time part. filled pipe A process variable is selected Enter time before diagnostic 0 to 100 s 1s
detect. in the Assign process variable message is displayed for
parameter (→  109). partially filled pipe detection.

Endress+Hauser 109
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

10.5 Advanced settings

The Advanced setup submenu together with its submenus contains parameters for
specific settings.
Navigation to the "Advanced setup" submenu

XXXXXXXXX

20.50
mA
Main menu 0104-1
1. Display language
English
Display/operat.
Setup
Main menu
2. Display/operat.
Setup

Diagnostic
/ ../Setup
3. Medium selection

XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
/ ../Setup
4. XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
Advanced setup

/ ../Advanced setup 0092-1

5. Ent. access code

Device tag
****
Def. access code

A0032223-EN

The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version.
Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the
Operation Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation
for the device (→ "Supplementary documentation" section).

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup

‣ Advanced setup

Enter access code →  111

‣ Calculated values →  111

‣ Sensor adjustment →  112

‣ Totalizer 1 to n →  113

110 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

‣ SIL confirmation

‣ Deactivate SIL

‣ Display →  116

‣ WLAN settings →  120

‣ Concentration

‣ Heartbeat setup

‣ Configuration backup →  122

‣ Administration →  123

10.5.1 Using the parameter to enter the access code

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User entry

Enter access code Enter access code to disable write protection of parameters. Max. 16-digit character string comprising
numbers, letters and special characters

10.5.2 Calculated values

The Calculated values submenu contains parameters for calculating the corrected volume
flow.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Calculated values

‣ Calculated values

‣ Corrected volume flow calculation

Corrected volume flow calculation →  112

External reference density →  112

Fixed reference density →  112

Reference temperature →  112

Endress+Hauser 111
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Linear expansion coefficient →  112

Square expansion coefficient →  112

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Corrected volume flow calculation – Select reference density for • Fixed reference Calculated reference
calculating the corrected density density
volume flow. • Calculated
reference density
• Current input 1 *
• Current input 2 *

External reference density One of the following options is Shows external reference Floating point –
selected in the Corrected density. number with sign
volume flow calculation
parameter:
• Current input 1 *
• Current input 2 *

Fixed reference density The Fixed reference density Enter fixed value for reference Positive floating- 1 kg/Nl
option is selected in the density. point number
Corrected volume flow
calculation parameter
parameter.

Reference temperature The Calculated reference Enter reference temperature –273.15 to 99 999 °C Country-specific:
density option is selected in for calculating the reference • +20 °C
the Corrected volume flow density. • +68 °F
calculation parameter
parameter.

Linear expansion coefficient The Calculated reference Enter linear, medium-specific Signed floating-point 0.0 1/K
density option is selected in expansion coefficient for number
the Corrected volume flow calculating the reference
calculation parameter density.
parameter.

Square expansion coefficient The Calculated reference For media with a non-linear Signed floating-point 0.0 1/K²
density option is selected in expansion pattern: enter the number
the Corrected volume flow quadratic, medium-specific
calculation parameter expansion coefficient for
parameter. calculating the reference
density.

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.3 Carrying out a sensor adjustment

The Sensor adjustment submenu contains parameters that pertain to the functionality of
the sensor.

112 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Sensor adjustment

‣ Sensor adjustment

Installation direction →  113

‣ Zero point adjustment →  113

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description Selection Factory setting

Installation direction Set sign of flow direction to match the • Flow in arrow direction Flow in arrow direction
direction of the arrow on the sensor. • Flow against arrow direction

Zero point adjustment

All measuring devices are calibrated in accordance with state-of-the-art technology.
Calibration takes place under reference conditions→  184. Therefore, a zero point
adjustment in the field is generally not required.
Experience shows that zero point adjustment is advisable only in special cases:
• To achieve maximum measuring accuracy even with low flow rates.
• Under extreme process or operating conditions (e.g. very high process temperatures or
very high-viscosity fluids).

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Sensor adjustment → Zero point adjustment

‣ Zero point adjustment

Zero point adjustment control →  113

Progress →  113

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description Selection / User interface Factory setting

Zero point adjustment control Start zero point adjustment. • Cancel Cancel
• Start

Progress Shows the progress of the process. 0 to 100 % –

10.5.4 Configuring the totalizer

In the "Totalizer 1 to n" submenu the individual totalizer can be configured.

Endress+Hauser 113
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Totalizer 1 to n

‣ Totalizer 1 to n

Assign process variable →  114

Unit totalizer 1 to n →  114

Totalizer operation mode →  115

Failure mode →  115

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection Factory setting

Assign process variable – Select process variable for • Off Mass flow
totalizer. • Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow *
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow *
• Carrier volume
flow *
• Target corrected
volume flow *
• Carrier corrected
volume flow *
• GSV flow *
• GSV flow
alternative *
• NSV flow *
• NSV flow
alternative *
• S&W volume flow *
• Oil mass flow *
• Water mass flow *
• Oil volume flow *
• Water volume
flow *
• Oil corrected
volume flow *
• Water corrected
volume flow *

Unit totalizer 1 to n A process variable is selected Select process variable totalizer Unit choose list Country-specific:
in the Assign process variable unit. • kg
parameter (→  114) of the • lb
Totalizer 1 to n submenu.

114 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection Factory setting

Totalizer operation mode A process variable is selected Select totalizer calculation • Net flow total Net flow total
in the Assign process variable mode. • Forward flow total
parameter (→  114) of the • Reverse flow total
Totalizer 1 to n submenu.

Failure mode A process variable is selected Define totalizer behavior in • Stop Stop
in the Assign process variable alarm condition. • Actual value
parameter (→  114) of the • Last valid value
Totalizer 1 to n submenu.

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser 115
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

10.5.5 Carrying out additional display configurations

In the Display submenu you can set all the parameters associated with the configuration
of the local display.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Display

‣ Display

Format display →  117

Value 1 display →  118

0% bargraph value 1 →  119

100% bargraph value 1 →  119

Decimal places 1 →  119

Value 2 display →  119

Decimal places 2 →  119

Value 3 display →  119

0% bargraph value 3 →  119

100% bargraph value 3 →  119

Decimal places 3 →  119

Value 4 display →  119

Decimal places 4 →  119

Display language →  120

Display interval →  120

Display damping →  120

Header →  120

Header text →  120

Separator →  120

Backlight →  120

116 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Format display A local display is provided. Select how measured values • 1 value, max. size 1 value, max. size
are shown on the display. • 1 bargraph + 1
value
• 2 values
• 1 value large + 2
values
• 4 values

Endress+Hauser 117
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Value 1 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that • Mass flow Mass flow
is shown on the local display. • Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow *
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow *
• Carrier volume
flow *
• Target corrected
volume flow *
• Carrier corrected
volume flow *
• Density
• Reference density *
• Reference density
alternative *
• GSV flow *
• GSV flow
alternative *
• NSV flow *
• NSV flow
alternative *
• S&W volume flow *
• Water cut *
• Oil density *
• Water density *
• Oil mass flow *
• Water mass flow *
• Oil volume flow *
• Water volume
flow *
• Oil corrected
volume flow *
• Water corrected
volume flow *
• Weighted density
average *
• Weighted
temperature
average *
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Electronic
temperature
• Oscillation
frequency 0
• Oscillation
amplitude 0 *
• Frequency
fluctuation 0 *
• Oscillation
damping 0 *
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0 *
• Signal asymmetry *
• Exciter current 0 *
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Current output 1 *
• Current output 2 *
• Current output 3 *
• Pressure
• Application
specific output 1 *

118 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry
• Index
inhomogeneous
medium
• Application
specific output 0 *
• Index suspended
bubbles *

0% bargraph value 1 A local display is provided. Enter 0% value for bar graph Signed floating-point Country-specific:
display. number • 0 kg/h
• 0 lb/min

100% bargraph value 1 A local display is provided. Enter 100% value for bar Signed floating-point Depends on country
graph display. number and nominal
diameter

Decimal places 1 A measured value is specified Select the number of decimal • x x.xx
in the Value 1 display places for the display value. • x.x
parameter. • x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx

Value 2 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that For the picklist, see None
is shown on the local display. the Value 2 display
parameter
(→  107)

Decimal places 2 A measured value is specified Select the number of decimal • x x.xx
in the Value 2 display places for the display value. • x.x
parameter. • x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx

Value 3 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that For the picklist, see None
is shown on the local display. the Value 2 display
parameter
(→  107)

0% bargraph value 3 A selection was made in the Enter 0% value for bar graph Signed floating-point Country-specific:
Value 3 display parameter. display. number • 0 kg/h
• 0 lb/min

100% bargraph value 3 A selection was made in the Enter 100% value for bar Signed floating-point 0
Value 3 display parameter. graph display. number

Decimal places 3 A measured value is specified Select the number of decimal • x x.xx
in the Value 3 display places for the display value. • x.x
parameter. • x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx

Value 4 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that For the picklist, see None
is shown on the local display. the Value 2 display
parameter
(→  107)

Decimal places 4 A measured value is specified Select the number of decimal • x x.xx
in the Value 4 display places for the display value. • x.x
parameter. • x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx

Endress+Hauser 119
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Display language A local display is provided. Set display language. • English English
• Deutsch (alternatively, the
• Français ordered language is
• Español preset in the device)
• Italiano
• Nederlands
• Portuguesa
• Polski
• русский язык
(Russian)
• Svenska
• Türkçe
• 中文 (Chinese)
• 日本語 (Japanese)
• 한국어 (Korean)
• ‫( الْعَرَبيّة‬Arabic) *
• Bahasa Indonesia
• ภาษาไทย (Thai) *
• tiếng Việt
(Vietnamese)
• čeština (Czech)

Display interval A local display is provided. Set time measured values are 1 to 10 s 5s
shown on display if display
alternates between values.

Display damping A local display is provided. Set display reaction time to 0.0 to 999.9 s 0.0 s
fluctuations in the measured
value.

Header A local display is provided. Select header contents on local • Device tag Device tag
display. • Free text

Header text In the Header parameter, the Enter display header text. Max. 12 characters ------------
Free text option is selected. such as letters,
numbers or special
characters (e.g. @,
%, /)

Separator A local display is provided. Select decimal separator for • . (point) . (point)
displaying numerical values. • , (comma)

Backlight One of the following Switch the local display • Disable Enable
conditions is met: backlight on and off. • Enable
• Order code for "Display;
operation", option F "4-line,
illum.; touch control"
• Order code for "Display;
operation", option G "4-line,
illum.; touch control
+WLAN"
• Order code for "Display;
operation", option O
"Separate 4-line display,
illum.; 10m/30ft cable;
touch control"

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.6 WLAN configuration

The WLAN Settings submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters
that have to be set for the WLAN configuration.

120 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → WLAN Settings

‣ WLAN settings

WLAN IP address →  121

Security type →  121

WLAN passphrase →  121

Assign SSID name →  121

SSID name →  121

Apply changes →  121

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description User entry / Factory setting

Selection

WLAN IP address – Enter IP address of the WLAN 4 octet: 0 to 255 (in 192.168.1.212
interface of the device. the particular octet)

Network security – Select the security type of the • Unsecured WPA2-PSK

WLAN network. • WPA2-PSK
• EAP-PEAP with
MSCHAPv2 *
• EAP-PEAP
MSCHAPv2 no
server authentic. *
• EAP-TLS *

WLAN passphrase The WPA2-PSK option is Enter the network key (8 to 32 8 to 32-digit Serial number of the
selected in the Security type characters). character string measuring device
parameter. comprising numbers, (e.g. L100A802000)
 The network key
supplied with the device letters and special
characters (without
should be changed
spaces)
during commissioning
for security reasons.

Assign SSID name – Select which name will be used • Device tag User-defined
for SSID: device tag or user- • User-defined
defined name.

SSID name • The User-defined option is Enter the user-defined SSID Max. 32-digit EH_device
selected in the Assign SSID name (max. 32 characters). character string designation_last 7
name parameter. comprising numbers, digits of the serial
• The WLAN access point  The user-defined SSID
name may only be letters and special number (e.g.
option is selected in the assigned once. If the SSID characters EH_Promass_300_A
WLAN mode parameter. 802000)
name is assigned more
than once, the devices
can interfere with one
another.

Apply changes – Use changed WLAN settings. • Cancel Cancel

• Ok

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser 121
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

10.5.7 Configuration management

After commissioning, you can save the current device configurationor restore the previous
device configuration.
You can do so using the Configuration management parameter and the related options
found in the Configuration backup submenu.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Configuration backup

‣ Configuration backup

Operating time →  122

Last backup →  122

Configuration management →  122

Backup state →  122

Comparison result →  122

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface / Selection Factory setting

Operating time Indicates how long the device has been in Days (d), hours (h), minutes –
operation. (m) and seconds (s)

Last backup Shows when the last data backup was saved Days (d), hours (h), minutes –
to HistoROM backup. (m) and seconds (s)

Configuration management Select action for managing the device data in • Cancel Cancel
the HistoROM backup. • Execute backup
• Restore *
• Compare *
• Clear backup data

Backup state Shows the current status of data saving or • None None
restoring. • Backup in progress
• Restoring in progress
• Delete in progress
• Compare in progress
• Restoring failed
• Backup failed

Comparison result Comparison of current device data with • Settings identical Check not done
HistoROM backup. • Settings not identical
• No backup available
• Backup settings corrupt
• Check not done
• Dataset incompatible

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

122 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Function scope of the "Configuration management" parameter

Options Description

Cancel No action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

Execute backup A backup copy of the current device configuration is saved from the HistoROM
backup to the memory of the device. The backup copy includes the transmitter data
of the device.

Restore The last backup copy of the device configuration is restored from the device
memory to the device's HistoROM backup. The backup copy includes the
transmitter data of the device.

Compare The device configuration saved in the device memory is compared with the current
device configuration of the HistoROM backup.

Clear backup data The backup copy of the device configuration is deleted from the memory of the
device.

HistoROM backup
A HistoROM is a "non-volatile" device memory in the form of an EEPROM.
While this action is in progress, the configuration cannot be edited via the local
display and a message on the processing status appears on the display.

10.5.8 Using parameters for device administration

The Administration submenu systematically guides the user through all the parameters
that can be used for device administration purposes.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration

‣ Administration

‣ Define access code →  123

‣ Reset access code →  124

Device reset →  124

Using the parameter to define the access code

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Define access code

‣ Define access code

Define access code →  124

Confirm access code →  124

Endress+Hauser 123
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User entry

Define access code Restrict write-access to parameters to protect the configuration Max. 16-digit character string comprising
of the device against unintentional changes. numbers, letters and special characters

Confirm access code Confirm the entered access code. Max. 16-digit character string comprising
numbers, letters and special characters

Using the parameter to reset the access code

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Reset access code

‣ Reset access code

Operating time →  124

Reset access code →  124

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface / User entry Factory setting

Operating time Indicates how long the device has been in Days (d), hours (h), minutes –
operation. (m) and seconds (s)

Reset access code Reset access code to factory settings. Character string comprising 0x00
numbers, letters and special
 For a reset code, contact your
Endress+Hauser service organization. characters

The reset code can only be entered via:

• Web browser
• DeviceCare, FieldCare (via service
interface CDI-RJ45)
• Fieldbus

Using the parameter to reset the device

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description Selection Factory setting

Device reset Reset the device configuration - either • Cancel Cancel

entirely or in part - to a defined state. • To delivery settings
• Restart device
• Restore S-DAT backup *

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

124 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

10.6 Simulation
The Simulation submenu enables you to simulate, without a real flow situation, various
process variables in the process and the device alarm mode and to verify downstream
signal chains (switching valves or closed-control loops).

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Simulation

‣ Simulation

Assign simulation process variable →  126

Process variable value →  126

Status input simulation 1 to n →  126

Input signal level 1 to n →  126

Current input 1 to n simulation →  126

Value current input 1 to n →  126

Current output 1 to n simulation →  127

Value current output 1 to n →  127

Frequency output simulation 1 to n →  127

Frequency value 1 to n →  127

Pulse output simulation 1 to n →  127

Pulse value 1 to n →  127

Switch output simulation 1 to n →  127

Switch status 1 to n →  127

Relay output 1 to n simulation →  127

Switch status 1 to n →  127

Pulse output simulation →  127

Pulse value →  127

Device alarm simulation →  127

Endress+Hauser 125
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Diagnostic event category →  127

Diagnostic event simulation →  128

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry / User
interface

Assign simulation process variable – Select a process variable for • Off Off
the simulation process that is • Mass flow
activated. • Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow *
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow *
• Carrier volume
flow *
• Target corrected
volume flow *
• Carrier corrected
volume flow *
• Density
• Reference density *
• Reference density
alternative *
• GSV flow *
• GSV flow
alternative *
• NSV flow *
• NSV flow
alternative *
• S&W volume flow *
• Water cut *
• Oil density *
• Water density *
• Oil mass flow *
• Water mass flow *
• Oil volume flow *
• Water volume
flow *
• Oil corrected
volume flow *
• Water corrected
volume flow *
• Temperature
• Concentration *

Process variable value A process variable is selected Enter the simulation value for Depends on the 0
in the Assign simulation the selected process variable. process variable
process variable parameter selected
(→  126).

Status input simulation 1 to n – Switch simulation of the status • Off Off

input on and off. • On

Input signal level 1 to n In the Status input simulation Select the signal level for the • High High
parameter, the On option is simulation of the status input. • Low
selected.

Current input 1 to n simulation – Switch simulation of the • Off Off

current input on and off. • On

Value current input 1 to n In the Current input 1 to n Enter the current value for 0 to 22.5 mA 0 mA
simulation parameter, the On simulation.
option is selected.

126 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry / User
interface

Current output 1 to n simulation – Switch the simulation of the • Off Off

current output on and off. • On

Value current output 1 to n In the Current output 1 to n Enter the current value for 3.59 to 22.5 mA 3.59 mA
simulation parameter, the On simulation.
option is selected.

Frequency output simulation 1 to n In the Operating mode Switch the simulation of the • Off Off
parameter, the Frequency frequency output on and off. • On
option is selected.

Frequency value 1 to n In the Frequency output Enter the frequency value for 0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
simulation 1 to n parameter, the simulation.
the On option is selected.

Pulse output simulation 1 to n In the Operating mode Set and switch off the pulse • Off Off
parameter, the Pulse option is output simulation. • Fixed value
selected. • Down-counting
 Pulse
For Fixed value option:
width parameter value
(→  91) defines the
pulse width of the pulses
output.

Pulse value 1 to n In the Pulse output Enter the number of pulses for 0 to 65 535 0
simulation 1 to n parameter, simulation.
the Down-counting value
option is selected.

Switch output simulation 1 to n In the Operating mode Switch the simulation of the • Off Off
parameter, the Switch option switch output on and off. • On
is selected.

Switch status 1 to n – Select the status of the status • Open Open

output for the simulation. • Closed

Relay output 1 to n simulation – Switch simulation of the relay • Off Off

output on and off. • On

Switch status 1 to n The On option is selected in Select status of the relay • Open Open
the Switch output simulation output for the simulation. • Closed
1 to n parameter parameter.

Pulse output simulation – Set and switch off the pulse • Off Off
output simulation. • Fixed value
• Down-counting
 For Fixed value option:
Pulse width parameter value
defines the pulse width
of the pulses output.

Pulse value In the Pulse output Set and switch off the pulse 0 to 65 535 0
simulation parameter, the output simulation.
Down-counting value option
is selected.

Device alarm simulation – Switch the device alarm on and • Off Off
off. • On

Diagnostic event category – Select a diagnostic event • Sensor Process

category. • Electronics
• Configuration
• Process

Endress+Hauser 127
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry / User
interface

Diagnostic event simulation – Select a diagnostic event to • Off Off

simulate this event. • Diagnostic event
picklist (depends
on the category
selected)

Logging interval – Define the logging interval tlog 1.0 to 3 600.0 s –

for data logging. This value
defines the time interval
between the individual data
points in the memory.

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.7 Protecting settings from unauthorized access

The following write protection options exist in order to protect the configuration of the
measuring device from unintentional modification:
• Protect access to parameters via access code →  128
• Protect access to local operation via key locking →  55
• Protect access to measuring device via write protection switch →  129

10.7.1 Write protection via access code

The effects of the user-specific access code are as follows:
• Via local operation, the parameters for the measuring device configuration are write-
protected and their values can no longer be changed.
• Device access is protected via the Web browser, as are the parameters for the measuring
device configuration.
• Device access is protected via FieldCare or DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), as
are the parameters for the measuring device configuration.

Defining the access code via local display

1. Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  124).
2. Define a max. 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special
characters as the access code.
3. Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  124) to
confirm the code.
 The -symbol appears in front of all write-protected parameters.

The device automatically locks the write-protected parameters again if a key is not pressed
for 10 minutes in the navigation and editing view. The device locks the write-protected
parameters automatically after 60 s if the user skips back to the operational display mode
from the navigation and editing view.
• If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code →  54.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged on via the local display
→  54 is indicated by the Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation
→ Access status

Parameters which can always be modified via the local display

Certain parameters that do not affect the measurement are excepted from parameter write
protection via the local display. Despite the user-specific access code, they can always be
modified, even if the other parameters are locked.

128 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Commissioning

Parameters for configuring Parameters for configuring

the local display the totalizer

↓ ↓

Language Format display Control Totalizer

Contrast display Preset value

Display interval Reset all totalizers

Defining the access code via the Web browser

1. Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  124).
2. Define a max. 16-digit numeric code as an access code.
3. Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  124) to
confirm the code.
 The Web browser switches to the login page.

If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to

the login page.
• If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code →  54.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged on via Web browser is
indicated by the Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation → Access
status

Resetting the access code

If you misplace the user-specific access code, it is possible to reset the code to the factory
setting. A reset code must be entered for this purpose. The user-specific access code can
then be defined again afterwards.

Via Web browser, FieldCare, DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), fieldbus
For a reset code, contact your Endress+Hauser service organization.

1. Navigate to the Reset access code parameter (→  124).

2. Enter the reset code.
 The access code has been reset to the factory setting 0000. It can be redefined
→  128.

10.7.2 Write protection via write protection switch

Unlike parameter write protection via a user-specific access code, this allows write access
to the entire operating menu - except for the "Contrast display" parameter - to be locked.
The parameter values are now read only and cannot be edited any more (exception
"Contrast display" parameter):
• Via local display
• Via HART protocol

Endress+Hauser 129
Commissioning Proline Promass E 300 HART

1.
OFF ON
1
2
3
4

A0029630

Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the ON
position enables hardware write protection.
 In the Locking status parameter the Hardware locked option is displayed
→  131. In addition, on the local display the -symbol appears in front of the
parameters in the header of the operational display and in the navigation view.

XXXXXXXXX

20.50
XX XX

A0029425

2. Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the OFF
position (factory setting) disables hardware write protection.
 No option is displayed in the Locking status parameter →  131. On the local
display, the -symbol disappears from in front of the parameters in the header
of the operational display and in the navigation view.

130 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation

11 Operation

11.1 Reading the device locking status

Device active write protection: Locking status parameter

Operation → Locking status

Function scope of the "Locking status" parameter

Options Description

None The access status displayed in the Access status parameter applies →  54. Only
appears on local display.

Hardware locked The DIP switch for hardware locking is activated on the PCB board. This locks write
access to the parameters (e.g. via local display or operating tool) →  129.

SIL locked The SIL mode is enabled. This locks write access to the parameters (e.g. via local
display or operating tool).

Temporarily locked Write access to the parameters is temporarily locked on account of internal
processes running in the device (e.g. data upload/download, reset etc.). Once the
internal processing has been completed, the parameters can be changed once
again.

11.2 Adjusting the operating language

Detailed information:
• To configure the operating language →  77
• For information on the operating languages supported by the measuring device
→  194

11.3 Configuring the display

Detailed information:
• On the basic settings for the local display →  103
• On the advanced settings for the local display →  116

11.4 Reading measured values

With the Measured values submenu, it is possible to read all the measured values.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values

‣ Measured values

‣ Measured variables →  132

‣ Input values →  134

‣ Output values →  135

‣ Totalizer →  133

Endress+Hauser 131
Operation Proline Promass E 300 HART

11.4.1 "Measured variables" submenu

The Measured variables submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the
current measured values for each process variable.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Measured variables

‣ Measured variables

Mass flow →  132

Volume flow →  132

Corrected volume flow →  132

Density →  132

Reference density →  133

Temperature →  133

Pressure value →  133

Concentration →  133

Target mass flow →  133

Carrier mass flow →  133

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface

Mass flow – Displays the mass flow that is currently Signed floating-point
measured. number
Dependency
The unit is taken from the Mass flow
unit parameter (→  80).

Volume flow – Displays the volume flow currently Signed floating-point

calculated. number
Dependency
The unit is taken from the Volume flow
unit parameter (→  80).

Corrected volume flow – Displays the corrected volume flow that Signed floating-point
is currently calculated. number
Dependency
The unit is taken from the Corrected
volume flow unit parameter
(→  80).

Density – Shows the density currently measured. Signed floating-point

number
Dependency
The unit is taken from the Density unit
parameter (→  80).

132 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface

Reference density – Displays the reference density that is Signed floating-point

currently calculated. number
Dependency
The unit is taken from the Reference
density unit parameter (→  80).

Temperature – Shows the medium temperature Signed floating-point

currently measured. number
Dependency
The unit is taken from the
Temperature unit parameter
(→  81).

Pressure value – Displays either a fixed or external Signed floating-point

pressure value. number
Dependency
The unit is taken from the Pressure
unit parameter (→  81).

Concentration For the following order code: Displays the concentration that is Signed floating-point
Order code for "Application package", currently calculated. number
option ED "Concentration" Dependency

 The software options currently

enabled are displayed in the
The unit is taken from the
Concentration unit parameter.
Software option overview
parameter.

Target mass flow With the following conditions: Displays the mass flow that is currently Signed floating-point
Order code for "Application package", measured for the target medium. number
option ED "Concentration" Dependency

 The software options currently

enabled are displayed in the
The unit is taken from the Mass flow
unit parameter (→  80).
Software option overview
parameter.

Carrier mass flow With the following conditions: Displays the mass flow that is currently Signed floating-point
Order code for "Application package", measured for the carrier medium. number
option ED "Concentration" Dependency

 The software options currently

enabled are displayed in the
The unit is taken from the Mass flow
unit parameter (→  80).
Software option overview
parameter.

11.4.2 "Totalizer" submenu

The Totalizer submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every totalizer.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Totalizer

‣ Totalizer

Totalizer value 1 to n →  134

Totalizer overflow 1 to n →  134

Endress+Hauser 133
Operation Proline Promass E 300 HART

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface

Totalizer value 1 to n A process variable is selected in the Displays the current totalizer counter Signed floating-point
Assign process variable parameter value. number
(→  114) of the Totalizer 1 to n
submenu.

Totalizer overflow 1 to n A process variable is selected in the Displays the current totalizer overflow. Integer with sign
Assign process variable parameter
(→  114) of the Totalizer 1 to n
submenu.

11.4.3 "Input values" submenu

The Input values submenu guides you systematically to the individual input values.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values

‣ Input values

‣ Current input 1 to n →  134

‣ Status input 1 to n →  134

Input values of current input

The Current input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the
current measured values for every current input.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Current input 1 to n

‣ Current input 1 to n

Measured values 1 to n →  134

Measured current 1 to n →  134

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface

Measured values 1 to n Displays the current input value. Signed floating-point number

Measured current 1 to n Displays the current value of the current input. 0 to 22.5 mA

Input values of status input

The Status input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the
current measured values for every status input.

134 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Status input 1 to n

‣ Status input 1 to n

Value status input →  135

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface

Value status input Shows the current input signal level. • High
• Low

11.4.4 Output values

The Output values submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every output.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values

‣ Output values

‣ Current output 1 to n →  135

‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output →  136

1 to n

‣ Relay output 1 to n →  136

‣ Double pulse output →  137

Output values of current output

The Value current output submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the
current measured values for every current output.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Value current output 1 to n

‣ Current output 1 to n

Output current 1 to n →  136

Measured current 1 to n →  136

Endress+Hauser 135
Operation Proline Promass E 300 HART

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface

Output current 1 Displays the current value currently calculated for the current 3.59 to 22.5 mA
output.

Measured current Displays the current value currently measured for the current 0 to 30 mA
output.

Output values for pulse/frequency/switch output

The Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed
to display the current measured values for every pulse/frequency/switch output.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n

‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n

Output frequency 1 to n →  136

Pulse output 1 to n →  136

Switch status 1 to n →  136

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface

Output frequency 1 to n In the Operating mode parameter, the Displays the value currently measured 0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz
Frequency option is selected. for the frequency output.

Pulse output 1 to n The Pulse option is selected in the Displays the pulse frequency currently Positive floating-point
Operating mode parameter parameter. output. number

Switch status 1 to n The Switch option is selected in the Displays the current switch output • Open
Operating mode parameter. status. • Closed

Output values for relay output

The Relay output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the
current measured values for every relay output.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Relay output 1 to n

‣ Relay output 1 to n

Switch status →  137

Switch cycles →  137

Max. switch cycles number →  137

136 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface

Switch status Shows the current relay switch status. • Open

• Closed

Switch cycles Shows number of all performed switch cycles. Positive integer

Max. switch cycles number Shows the maximal number of guaranteed switch cycles. Positive integer

Output values for double pulse output

The Double pulse output submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the
current measured values for every double pulse output.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Double pulse output

‣ Double pulse output

Pulse output →  137

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface

Pulse output Shows the currently output pulse frequency. Positive floating-point number

11.5 Adapting the measuring device to the process

conditions
The following are available for this purpose:
• Basic settings using theSetup menu (→  77)
• Advanced settings using theAdvanced setup submenu (→  110)

11.6 Performing a totalizer reset

The totalizers are reset in the Operation submenu:
• Control Totalizer
• Reset all totalizers

Navigation
"Operation" menu → Totalizer handling

‣ Totalizer handling

Control Totalizer 1 to n →  138

Preset value 1 to n →  138

Reset all totalizers →  138

Endress+Hauser 137
Operation Proline Promass E 300 HART

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Control Totalizer 1 to n A process variable is selected Control totalizer value. • Totalize Totalize
in the Assign process variable • Reset + hold *
parameter (→  114) of the • Preset + hold *
Totalizer 1 to n submenu. • Reset + totalize
• Preset + totalize *
• Hold *

Preset value 1 to n A process variable is selected Specify start value for totalizer. Signed floating-point Country-specific:
in the Assign process variable Dependency number • 0 kg
parameter (→  114) of the • 0 lb
Totalizer 1 to n submenu.
 The unit of the selected
process variable is
specified for the totalizer
in the Unit totalizer
parameter (→  114).

Reset all totalizers – Reset all totalizers to 0 and • Cancel Cancel

start. • Reset + totalize

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

11.6.1 Function scope of the "Control Totalizer" parameter

Options Description

Totalize The totalizer is started or continues running.

Reset + hold The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is reset to 0.

Preset + hold The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is set to its defined start value
from the Preset value parameter.

Reset + totalize The totalizer is reset to 0 and the totaling process is restarted.

Preset + totalize The totalizer is set to the defined start value from the Preset value parameter and
the totaling process is restarted.

Hold Totalizing is stopped.

11.6.2 Function scope of the "Reset all totalizers" parameter

Options Description

Cancel No action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

Reset + totalize Resets all totalizers to 0 and restarts the totaling process. This deletes all the flow
values previously totalized.

11.7 Showing data logging

The Extended HistoROM application package must be enabled in the device (order
option) for the Data logging submenu to appear. This contains all the parameters for the
measured value history.
Data logging is also available via:
• Plant Asset Management Tool FieldCare →  65.
• Web browser

138 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation

Function range
• A total of 1000 measured values can be stored
• 4 logging channels
• Adjustable logging interval for data logging
• Displays the measured value trend for each logging channel in the form of a chart

/ ../XXXXXXXX
175.77

40.69 kg/h
-100s 0

A0016357

 31 Chart of a measured value trend

• x-axis: depending on the number of channels selected displays 250 to 1000 measured
values of a process variable.
• y-axis: displays the approximate measured value span and constantly adapts this to the
ongoing measurement.
If the length of the logging interval or the assignment of the process variables to the
channels is changed, the content of the data logging is deleted.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Data logging

‣ Data logging

Assign channel 1 →  141

Assign channel 2 →  142

Assign channel 3 →  142

Assign channel 4 →  142

Logging interval →  142

Clear logging data →  142

Data logging →  142

Logging delay →  142

Data logging control →  142

Data logging status →  142

Entire logging duration →  142

‣ Display channel 1

‣ Display channel 2

Endress+Hauser 139
Operation Proline Promass E 300 HART

‣ Display channel 3

‣ Display channel 4

140 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Operation

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry / User
interface

Assign channel 1 The Extended HistoROM Assign process variable to • Off Off
application package is logging channel. • Mass flow
available. • Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow *
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow *
• Carrier volume
flow *
• Target corrected
volume flow *
• Carrier corrected
volume flow *
• Density
• Reference density *
• Reference density
alternative *
• GSV flow *
• GSV flow
alternative *
• NSV flow *
• NSV flow
alternative *
• S&W volume flow *
• Water cut *
• Oil density *
• Water density *
• Oil mass flow *
• Water mass flow *
• Oil volume flow *
• Water volume
flow *
• Oil corrected
volume flow *
• Water corrected
volume flow *
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Electronic
temperature
• Oscillation
frequency 0
• Oscillation
amplitude *
• Frequency
fluctuation 0 *
• Oscillation
damping 0 *
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0 *
• Signal asymmetry *
• Exciter current 0 *
• HBSI *
• Current output 1 *
• Current output 2 *
• Current output 3 *
• Current output 4 *
• Pressure
• Application
specific output 1 *

Endress+Hauser 141
Operation Proline Promass E 300 HART

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry / User
interface
• Index
inhomogeneous
medium
• Application
specific output 0 *
• Index suspended
bubbles *

Assign channel 2 The Extended HistoROM Assign process variable to Picklist, see Assign Off
application package is logging channel. channel 1 parameter
available. (→  141)

 The software options

currently enabled are
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.

Assign channel 3 The Extended HistoROM Assign process variable to Picklist, see Assign Off
application package is logging channel. channel 1 parameter
available. (→  141)

 The software options

currently enabled are
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.

Assign channel 4 The Extended HistoROM Assign process variable to Picklist, see Assign Off
application package is logging channel. channel 1 parameter
available. (→  141)

 The software options

currently enabled are
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.

Logging interval The Extended HistoROM Define the logging interval for 0.1 to 3 600.0 s 1.0 s
application package is data logging. This value
available. defines the time interval
between the individual data
points in the memory.

Clear logging data The Extended HistoROM Clear the entire logging data. • Cancel Cancel
application package is • Clear data
available.

Data logging – Select the data logging • Overwriting Overwriting

method. • Not overwriting

Logging delay In the Data logging Enter the time delay for 0 to 999 h 0h
parameter, the Not measured value logging.
overwriting option is selected.

Data logging control In the Data logging Start and stop measured value • None None
parameter, the Not logging. • Delete + start
overwriting option is selected. • Stop

Data logging status In the Data logging Displays the measured value • Done Done
parameter, the Not logging status. • Delay active
overwriting option is selected. • Active
• Stopped

Entire logging duration In the Data logging Displays the total logging Positive floating- 0s
parameter, the Not duration. point number
overwriting option is selected.

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

142 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12 Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.1 General troubleshooting

For local display
Error Possible causes Solution

Local display dark and no output Supply voltage does not match the Apply the correct supply voltage
signals value indicated on the nameplate. →  33.

Local display dark and no output The polarity of the supply voltage is Correct the polarity.
signals wrong.

Local display dark and no output No contact between connecting Check the connection of the cables
signals cables and terminals. and correct if necessary.

Local display dark and no output Terminals are not plugged into the Check terminals.
signals I/O electronics module correctly.
Terminals are not plugged into the
main electronics module correctly.

Local display dark and no output I/O electronics module is defective. Order spare part →  168.
signals Main electronics module is
defective.

Local display is dark, but signal Display is set too bright or too dark. • Set the display brighter by
output is within the valid range simultaneously pressing  + .
• Set the display darker by
simultaneously pressing  + .

Local display is dark, but signal The cable of the display module is Insert the plug correctly into the
output is within the valid range not plugged in correctly. main electronics module and
display module.

Local display is dark, but signal Display module is defective. Order spare part →  168.
output is within the valid range

Backlighting of local display is red Diagnostic event with "Alarm" Take remedial measures →  153
diagnostic behavior has occurred.

Text on local display appears in a Incorrect operating language is 1. Press  +  for 2 s ("home
foreign language and cannot be configured. position").
understood. 2. Press .
3. Set the desired language in the
Display language parameter
(→  120).

Message on local display: Communication between the • Check the cable and the
"Communication Error" display module and the electronics connector between the main
"Check Electronics" is interrupted. electronics module and display
module.
• Order spare part →  168.

For output signals

Error Possible causes Solution

Signal output outside the valid Main electronics module is Order spare part →  168.
range defective.

Signal output outside the valid Main electronics module is Order spare part →  168.
current range defective.
(< 3.6 mA or > 22 mA) I/O electronics module is defective.

Endress+Hauser 143
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass E 300 HART

Error Possible causes Solution

Device shows correct value on local Configuration error Check and correct the parameter
display, but signal output is configuration.
incorrect, though in the valid range.

Device measures incorrectly. Configuration error or device is 1. Check and correct parameter
operated outside the application. configuration.
2. Observe limit values specified in
the "Technical Data".

For access
Error Possible causes Solution

No write access to parameters Hardware write protection enabled Set the write protection switch on
main electronics module to the OFF
position →  129.

No write access to parameters Current user role has limited access 1. Check user role →  54.
authorization 2. Enter correct customer-specific
access code →  54.

No connection via HART protocol Communication resistor missing or Install the communication resistor
incorrectly installed. (250 Ω) correctly. Observe the
maximum load →  177.

No connection via HART protocol Commubox Observe the documentation for the
• Connected incorrectly Commubox.
• Configured incorrectly
• Drivers not installed correctly  FXA195 HART: Document
"Technical Information"
• USB interface on computer TI00404F
configured incorrectly

Not connecting to Web server Web server disabled Using the "FieldCare" or "DeviceCare"
operating tool, check whether the
Web server of the measuring device
is enabled, and enable it if
necessary→  61.

Incorrect setting for the Ethernet 1. Check the properties of the

interface of the computer Internet protocol (TCP/IP)
→  57→  57.
2. Check the network settings with
the IT manager.

Not connecting to Web server Incorrect IP address Check the IP address:

192.168.1.212 →  57→  57

Not connecting to Web server Incorrect WLAN access data • Check WLAN network status.
• Log on to the device again using
WLAN access data.
• Verify that WLAN is enabled on
the measuring device and
operating device →  57.

WLAN communication disabled –

Not connecting to Web server, No WLAN network available • Check if WLAN reception is
FieldCare or DeviceCare present: LED on display module
is lit blue
• Check if WLAN connection is
enabled: LED on display module
flashes blue
• Switch on instrument function.

Network connection not present or WLAN network is weak. • Operating device is outside of
unstable reception range: Check network
status on operating device.
• To improve network
performance, use an external
WLAN antenna.

144 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Error Possible causes Solution

Parallel WLAN and Ethernet • Check network settings.

communication • Temporarily enable only the
WLAN as an interface.

Web browser frozen and operation Data transfer active Wait until data transfer or current
no longer possible action is finished.

Connection lost 1. Check cable connection and

power supply.
2. Refresh the Web browser and
restart if necessary.

Content of Web browser Not using optimum version of Web 1. Use the correct Web browser
incomplete or difficult to read server. version →  56.
2. Clear the Web browser cache and
restart the Web browser.

Unsuitable view settings. Change the font size/display ratio

of the Web browser.

No or incomplete display of • JavaScript not enabled 1. Enable JavaScript.

contents in the Web browser • JavaScript cannot be enabled 2. Enter http://XXX.XXX.X.XXX/
basic.html as the IP address.

Operation with FieldCare or Firewall of computer or network is Depending on the settings of the
DeviceCare via CDI-RJ45 service preventing communication firewall used on the computer or in
interface (port 8000) the network, the firewall must be
adapted or disabled to allow
FieldCare/DeviceCare access.

Flashing of firmware with FieldCare Firewall of computer or network is Depending on the settings of the
or DeviceCare via CDI-RJ45 service preventing communication firewall used on the computer or in
interface (via port 8000 or TFTP the network, the firewall must be
ports) adapted or disabled to allow
FieldCare/DeviceCare access.

12.2 Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes

12.2.1 Transmitter
Different LEDs in the transmitter provide information on the device status.

1 2 3 4 5

A0029629

1 Supply voltage
2 Device status
3 Not used
4 Communication
5 Service interface (CDI) active

LED Color Meaning

1 Supply voltage Off Supply voltage is off or too low.

Green Supply voltage is ok.

Endress+Hauser 145
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass E 300 HART

LED Color Meaning

2 Device status (normal Off Firmware error

operation)
Green Device status is ok.

Flashing green Device is not configured.

Red A diagnostic event with "Alarm" diagnostic behavior

has occurred.

Flashing red A diagnostic event with "Warning" diagnostic

behavior has occurred.

Flashing red/green The device restarts.

2 Device status (during Flashes red slowly If > 30 seconds: problem with the boot loader.
start-up)
Flashes red quickly If > 30 seconds: compatibility problem when
reading the firmware.

3 Not used – –

4 Communication Off Communication not active.

White Communication active.

5 Service interface (CDI) Off Not connected or no connection established.

Yellow Connected and connection established.

Flashing yellow Service interface active.

146 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.3 Diagnostic information on local display

12.3.1 Diagnostic message

Faults detected by the self-monitoring system of the measuring device are displayed as a
diagnostic message in alternation with the operational display.

Operational display in alarm condition Diagnostic message

2 1

XXXXXXXXX S XXXXXXXXX S

20.50 S801
Supply voltage
3
4

X XX i Menu

5
A0029426-EN

1 Status signal
2 Diagnostic behavior
3 Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
4 Short text
5 Operating elements

If two or more diagnostic events are pending simultaneously, only the message of the
diagnostic event with the highest priority is shown.
Other diagnostic events that have occurred can be displayed in the Diagnostics menu:
• Via parameter →  157
• Via submenus →  158

Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
The status signals are categorized according to VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107: F = Failure, C = Function Check, S = Out of Specification, M
= Maintenance Required

Symbol Meaning

Failure
A device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.

Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).

Out of specification
The device is operated:
• Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)
• Outside of the configuration carried out by the user (e.g. maximum flow in parameter
20 mA value)

Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value remains valid.

Endress+Hauser 147
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass E 300 HART

Diagnostic behavior

Symbol Meaning

Alarm
• Measurement is interrupted.
• Signal outputs and totalizers assume the defined alarm condition.
• A diagnostic message is generated.

Warning
Measurement is resumed. The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected. A diagnostic
message is generated.

Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you by
providing information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.

Diagnostic information

Diagnostic code

Diagnostic Diagnostic
Status signal Short text
behavior number

↓ ↓ ↓

Example 441 Curr.output 1

A0013962 A0013958

NAMUR 3-digit number

NE 107

Operating elements

Key Meaning

Plus key
In a menu, submenu
Opens the message about remedy information.

Enter key
In a menu, submenu
Opens the operating menu.

148 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.3.2 Calling up remedial measures

XXXXXXXXX S XXXXXXXXX S

20.50 S801
Supply voltage

X XX i Menu

1.

Diagnostic list S
Diagnostics 1
1 S801 Supply voltage
Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3

2.

2 Supply voltage (ID:203) 3

4 S801 0d00h02m25s 5
Increase supply voltage
6

3.

A0029431-EN

 32 Message about remedial measures

1 Diagnostic information
2 Short text
3 Service ID
4 Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
5 Operation time of occurrence
6 Remedial measures

1. The user is in the diagnostic message.

Press  ( symbol).
 The Diagnostic list submenu opens.
2. Select the desired diagnostic event with  or  and press  .
 The message about the remedial measures opens.
3. Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message about the remedial measures closes.

The user is in the Diagnostics menu at an entry for a diagnostics event, e.g. in the
Diagnostic list submenu or Previous diagnostics parameter.
1. Press .
 The message for the remedial measures for the selected diagnostic event opens.
2. Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message for the remedial measures closes.

12.4 Diagnostic information in the Web browser

12.4.1 Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed in the Web browser on the
home page once the user has logged on.

Endress+Hauser 149
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass E 300 HART

2 3
A0031056

1 Status area with status signal

2 Diagnostic information
3 Remedy information with Service ID

In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:
• Via parameter →  157
• Via submenu →  158

Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).

Symbol Meaning

Failure
A device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.

Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).

Out of specification
The device is operated:
• Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)
• Outside of the configuration carried out by the user (e.g. maximum flow in parameter
20 mA value)

Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value is still valid.

The status signals are categorized in accordance with VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107.

12.4.2 Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can be
rectified quickly. These measures are displayed in red along with the diagnostic event and
the related diagnostic information.

150 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.5 Diagnostic information in FieldCare or DeviceCare

12.5.1 Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed on the home page of the
operating tool once the connection has been established.

Xxxxxx/…/…/
Device name: Xxxxxxx Mass flow: 12.34 kg/h
Device tag: Xxxxxxx Volume flow: 12.34 m³/h
Status signal: Function check (C)

Xxxxxx
P Diagnostics 1: C485 Simu...
P Remedy information: Deactivate...
P Access status tooling: Mainenance Failure (F)

+ Operation Function check (C) 2

+ Setup Diagnostics 1: C485 Simulation measured vari...
+ Diagnostics Remedy information: Deactivate Simulation (Service...
+ Expert
Out of spezification (S) 3
Maintenance required (M)

A0021799-EN

1 Status area with status signal→  147

2 Diagnostic information→  148
3 Remedy information with Service ID

In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:
• Via parameter →  157
• Via submenu →  158

Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you by
providing information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.

Diagnostic information

Diagnostic code

Diagnostic Diagnostic
Status signal Short text
behavior number

↓ ↓ ↓

Example 441 Curr.output 1

A0013962 A0013958

NAMUR 3-digit number

NE 107

Endress+Hauser 151
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass E 300 HART

12.5.2 Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can be
rectified quickly:
• On the home page
Remedy information is displayed in a separate field below the diagnostics information.
• In the Diagnostics menu
Remedy information can be called up in the working area of the user interface.

The user is in the Diagnostics menu.

1. Call up the desired parameter.
2. On the right in the working area, mouse over the parameter.
 A tool tip with remedy information for the diagnostic event appears.

12.6 Adapting the diagnostic information

12.6.1 Adapting the diagnostic behavior

Each item of diagnostic information is assigned a specific diagnostic behavior at the
factory. The user can change this assignment for specific diagnostic information in the
Diagnostic behavior submenu.
Expert → System → Diagnostic handling → Diagnostic behavior

/ ../Diagn. behavior 0723-1

Diagnostic no. 044
Warning
Diagnostic no. 274
Diagnostic no. 801

A0014048-EN

 33 Taking the example of the local display

You can assign the following options to the diagnostic number as the diagnostic behavior:

Options Description

Alarm The device stops measurement. The signal outputs and totalizers assume the defined
alarm condition. A diagnostic message is generated.
The background lighting changes to red.

Warning The device continues to measure. The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected. A
diagnostic message is generated.

Logbook entry only The device continues to measure. The diagnostic message is displayed only in the Event
logbook submenu (Event list submenu) and is not displayed in alternation with the
operational display.

Off The diagnostic event is ignored, and no diagnostic message is generated or entered.

12.6.2 Adapting the status signal

Each item of diagnostic information is assigned a specific status signal at the factory. The
user can change this assignment for specific diagnostic information in the Diagnostic
event category submenu.
Expert → Communication → Diagnostic event category

152 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Available status signals

Configuration as per HART 7 Specification (Condensed Status), in accordance with
NAMUR NE107.

Symbol Meaning

Failure
A device error is present. The measured value is no longer valid.
A0013956

Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
A0013959

Out of specification
The device is being operated:
• Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)
A0013958 • Outside of the configuration carried out by the user (e.g. maximum flow in parameter
20 mA value)

Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value is still valid.
A0013957

Has no effect on the condensed status.

A0023076

12.7 Overview of diagnostic information

The amount of diagnostic information and the number of measured variables affected
increase if the measuring device has one or more application packages.
In the case of some items of diagnostic information, the status signal and the
diagnostic behavior can be changed. Change the diagnostic information →  152

Diagnostic Short text Remedy instructions Status Diagnostic

number signal behavior
[from the [from the
factory] factory]

Diagnostic of sensor

022 Temperature sensor 1. Check or replace sensor electronic F Alarm

defective module (ISEM)
2. If available: Check connection cable
between sensor and transmitter
3. Replace sensor

046 Sensor limit exceeded 1. Inspect sensor S Warning 1)

2. Check process condition

062 Sensor connection faulty 1. Check or replace sensor electronic F Alarm

module (ISEM)
2. If available: Check connection cable
between sensor and transmitter
3. Replace sensor

063 Exciter current faulty 1. Check or replace sensor electronic S Alarm

module (ISEM)
2. If available: Check connection cable
between sensor and transmitter
3. Replace sensor

082 Data storage 1. Check module connections F Alarm

2. Contact service

083 Memory content 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Restore HistoROM S-DAT backup
('Device reset' parameter)
3. Replace HistoROM S-DAT

Endress+Hauser 153
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass E 300 HART

Diagnostic Short text Remedy instructions Status Diagnostic

number signal behavior
[from the [from the
factory] factory]

140 Sensor signal 1. Check or replace sensor electronic S Alarm 1)

asymmetrical module (ISEM)
2. If available: Check connection cable
between sensor and transmitter
3. Replace sensor

144 Measurement error too 1. Check or change sensor F Alarm 1)

high 2. Check process conditions

Diagnostic of electronic

201 Device failure 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Contact service

242 Software incompatible 1. Check software F Alarm

2. Flash or change main electronics
module

252 Modules incompatible 1. Check electronic modules F Alarm

2. Check if correct modules are
available (e.g. NEx, Ex)
3. Replace electronic modules

252 Modules incompatible 1. Check if correct electronic modul is F Alarm

plugged
2. Replace electronic module

262 Sensor electronic 1. Check or replace connection cable F Alarm

connection faulty between sensor electronic module
(ISEM) and main electronics
2. Check or replace ISEM or main
electronics

270 Main electronic failure Change main electronic module F Alarm

271 Main electronic failure 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Change main electronic module

272 Main electronic failure 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Contact service

273 Main electronic failure Change electronic F Alarm

275 I/O module 1 to n Change I/O module F Alarm

defective

276 I/O module 1 to n faulty 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Change I/O module

283 Memory content 1. Reset device F Alarm

2. Contact service

302 Device verification active Device verification active, please wait. C Warning

303 I/O 1 to n configuration 1. Apply I/O module configuration M Warning

changed (parameter 'Apply I/O
configuration')
2. Afterwards reload device
description and check wiring

311 Electronic failure 1. Do not reset device M Warning

2. Contact service

332 Writing in HistoROM Replace user interface board F Alarm

backup failed Ex d/XP: replace transmitter

361 I/O module 1 to n faulty 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Check electronic modules
3. Change I/O Modul or main
electronics

154 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic Short text Remedy instructions Status Diagnostic

number signal behavior
[from the [from the
factory] factory]

372 Sensor electronic (ISEM) 1. Restart device F Alarm

faulty 2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace sensor electronic module
(ISEM)

373 Sensor electronic (ISEM) 1. Transfer data or reset device F Alarm

faulty 2. Contact service

374 Sensor electronic (ISEM) 1. Restart device S Warning 1)

faulty 2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace sensor electronic module
(ISEM)

375 I/O- 1 to n 1. Restart device F Alarm

communication failed 2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace module rack inclusive
electronic modules

378 Supply voltage ISEM Check supply voltage to the ISEM F Alarm
faulty

382 Data storage 1. Insert T-DAT F Alarm

2. Replace T-DAT

383 Memory content 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Delete T-DAT via 'Reset device'
parameter
3. Replace T-DAT

387 HistoROM data faulty Contact service organization F Alarm

Diagnostic of configuration

330 Flash file invalid 1. Update firmware of device M Warning

2. Restart device

331 Firmware update failed 1. Update firmware of device F Warning

2. Restart device

410 Data transfer 1. Check connection F Alarm

2. Retry data transfer

412 Processing download Download active, please wait C Warning

431 Trim 1 to n Carry out trim C Warning

437 Configuration 1. Restart device F Alarm

incompatible 2. Contact service

438 Dataset 1. Check data set file M Warning

2. Check device configuration
3. Up- and download new
configuration

441 Current output 1 to n 1. Check process S Warning 1)

2. Check current output settings

442 Frequency output 1 to n 1. Check process S Warning 1)

2. Check frequency output settings

443 Pulse output 1 to n 1. Check process S Warning 1)

2. Check pulse output settings

444 Current input 1 to n 1. Check process S Warning 1)

2. Check current input settings

453 Flow override Deactivate flow override C Warning

484 Failure mode simulation Deactivate simulation C Alarm

485 Measured variable Deactivate simulation C Warning

simulation

Endress+Hauser 155
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass E 300 HART

Diagnostic Short text Remedy instructions Status Diagnostic

number signal behavior
[from the [from the
factory] factory]

486 Current input 1 to n Deactivate simulation C Warning

simulation

491 Current output 1 to n Deactivate simulation C Warning

simulation

492 Simulation frequency Deactivate simulation frequency C Warning

output 1 to n output

493 Simulation pulse output Deactivate simulation pulse output C Warning

1 to n

494 Switch output simulation Deactivate simulation switch output C Warning

1 to n

495 Diagnostic event Deactivate simulation C Warning

simulation

496 Status input simulation Deactivate simulation status input C Warning

502 CT activation/ Follow the sequence of the custody C Warning

deactivation failed transfer activation/deactivation: First
authorized user login, then set the DIP
switch on the main electonic module

520 I/O 1 to n hardware 1. Check I/O hardware configuration F Alarm

configuration invalid 2. Replace wrong I/O module
3. Plug the module of double pulse
output on correct slot

528 Concentration Out of valid range of the selected S Alarm

calculation not possible calculation algorithm
1. Check concentration settings
2. Check measured values, e.g. density
or temperature

529 Concentration Out of valid range of the selected S Warning

calculation not accurate calculation algorithm
1. Check concentration settings
2. Check measured values, e.g. density
or temperature

537 Configuration 1. Check IP addresses in network F Warning

2. Change IP address

540 Custody transfer mode 1. Power off device and toggle DIP F Alarm
failed switch
2. Deactivate custody transfer mode
3. Reactivate custody transfer mode
4. Check electronic components

543 Double pulse output 1. Check process S Warning 1)

2. Check pulse output settings

593 Double pulse output Deactivate simulation pulse output C Warning

simulation

594 Relay output simulation Deactivate simulation switch output C Warning

599 Custody transfer logbook 1. Deactivate custody transfer mode F Warning

full 2. Clear custody transfer logbook (all
30 entries)
3. Activate custody transfer mode

Diagnostic of process

803 Current loop 1. Check wiring F Alarm

2. Change I/O module

830 Sensor temperature too Reduce ambient temp. around the S Warning 1)
high sensor housing

156 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic Short text Remedy instructions Status Diagnostic

number signal behavior
[from the [from the
factory] factory]

831 Sensor temperature too Increase ambient temp. around the S Warning 1)
low sensor housing

832 Electronic temperature Reduce ambient temperature S Warning 1)

too high

833 Electronic temperature Increase ambient temperature S Warning 1)

too low

834 Process temperature too Reduce process temperature S Warning 1)

high

835 Process temperature too Increase process temperature S Warning 1)

low

842 Process limit Low flow cut off active! S Warning 1)

1. Check low flow cut off configuration

862 Partly filled pipe 1. Check for gas in process S Warning 1)

2. Adjust detection limits

882 Input signal 1. Check input configuration F Alarm

2. Check external device or process
conditions

910 Tubes not oscillating 1. Check electronic F Alarm

2. Inspect sensor

912 Medium inhomogeneous 1. Check process cond. S Warning 1)

2. Increase system pressure

913 Medium unsuitable 1. Check process conditions S Warning 1)

2. Check electronic modules or sensor

941 API temperature out of 1. Check process temperature with S Warning 1)

specification selected API commodity group
2. Check API related parameters

942 API density out of 1. Check process density with selected S Warning 1)
specification API commodity group
2. Check API related parameters

943 API pressure out of 1. Check process pressure with S Warning 1)

specification selected API commodity group
2. Check API related parameters

944 Monitoring failed Check process conditions for Heartbeat S Warning 1)

Monitoring

948 Oscillation damping too Check process conditions S Warning 1)

high

1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

12.8 Pending diagnostic events

The Diagnostics menu allows the user to view the current diagnostic event and the
previous diagnostic event separately.
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:
• Via local display →  149
• Via Web browser →  150
• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  152
• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  152
Other pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list submenu
→  158

Endress+Hauser 157
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass E 300 HART

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu

 Diagnostics

Actual diagnostics →  158

Previous diagnostics →  158

Operating time from restart →  158

Operating time →  158

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface

Actual diagnostics A diagnostic event has occurred. Shows the current occured diagnostic Symbol for diagnostic
event along with its diagnostic behavior, diagnostic code
information. and short message.

 Ifsimultaneously,
two or more messages occur
the message with
the highest priority is shown on
the display.

Previous diagnostics Two diagnostic events have already Shows the diagnostic event that Symbol for diagnostic
occurred. occurred prior to the current diagnostic behavior, diagnostic code
event along with its diagnostic and short message.
information.

Operating time from restart – Shows the time the device has been in Days (d), hours (h),
operation since the last device restart. minutes (m) and seconds
(s)

Operating time – Indicates how long the device has been Days (d), hours (h),
in operation. minutes (m) and seconds
(s)

12.9 Diagnostic list

Up to 5 currently pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list
submenu along with the associated diagnostic information. If more than 5 diagnostic
events are pending, the events with the highest priority are shown on the display.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Diagnostic list

158 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Diagnostics and troubleshooting

/ ../Diagnose list
Diagnostics
F273 Main electronic
Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3

A0014006-EN

 34 Taking the example of the local display

To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:

• Via local display →  149
• Via Web browser →  150
• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  152
• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  152

12.10 Event logbook

12.10.1 Reading out the event logbook

A chronological overview of the event messages that have occurred is provided in the
Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics menu → Event logbook submenu → Event list

/ ../Eventlist F
I1091 Config. change
I1157 Mem.err. ev.list
0d01h19m10s
F311 Electr. failure

A0014008-EN

 35 Taking the example of the local display

• A maximum of 20 event messages can be displayed in chronological order.

• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled in the device,
the event list can contain up to 100 entries .
The event history includes entries for:
• Diagnostic events →  153
• Information events →  160
In addition to the operation time of its occurrence, each event is also assigned a symbol
that indicates whether the event has occurred or is ended:
• Diagnostic event
• : Occurrence of the event
• : End of the event
• Information event
: Occurrence of the event
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:
• Via local display →  149
• Via Web browser →  150
• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  152
• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  152
For filtering the displayed event messages →  160

Endress+Hauser 159
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass E 300 HART

12.10.2 Filtering the event logbook

Using the Filter options parameter you can define which category of event message is
displayed in the Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Event logbook → Filter options
Filter categories
• All
• Failure (F)
• Function check (C)
• Out of specification (S)
• Maintenance required (M)
• Information (I)

12.10.3 Overview of information events

Unlike a diagnostic event, an information event is displayed in the event logbook only and
not in the diagnostic list.

Info number Info name

I1000 --------(Device ok)

I1079 Sensor changed

I1089 Power on

I1090 Configuration reset

I1091 Configuration changed

I1092 HistoROM backup deleted

I1111 Density adjust failure

I1137 Electronic changed

I1151 History reset

I1155 Reset electronic temperature

I1156 Memory error trend

I1157 Memory error event list

I1209 Density adjustment ok

I1221 Zero point adjust failure

I1222 Zero point adjustment ok

I1256 Display: access status changed

I1264 Safety sequence aborted

I1278 I/O module restarted

I1335 Firmware changed

I1361 Web server: login failed

I1397 Fieldbus: access status changed

I1398 CDI: access status changed

I1444 Device verification passed

I1445 Device verification failed

I1447 Record application reference data

I1448 Application reference data recorded

I1449 Recording application ref. data failed

I1450 Monitoring off

160 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Info number Info name

I1451 Monitoring on

I1457 Measurement error verification failed

I1459 I/O module verification failed

I1460 HBSI verification failed

I1461 Sensor verification failed

I1462 Sensor electronic module verific. failed

I1512 Download started

I1513 Download finished

I1514 Upload started

I1515 Upload finished

I1517 Custody transfer active

I1518 Custody transfer inactive

I1554 Safety sequence started

I1555 Safety sequence confirmed

I1556 Safety mode off

I1618 I/O module 2 replaced

I1619 I/O module 3 replaced

I1621 I/O module 4 replaced

I1622 Calibration changed

I1624 Reset all totalizers

I1625 Write protection activated

I1626 Write protection deactivated

I1627 Web server: login successful

I1628 Display: login successful

I1629 CDI: login successful

I1631 Web server access changed

I1632 Display: login failed

I1633 CDI: login failed

I1634 Reset to factory settings

I1635 Reset to delivery settings

I1639 Max. switch cycles number reached

I1643 Custody transfer logbook cleared

I1649 Hardware write protection activated

I1650 Hardware write protection deactivated

I1651 Custody transfer parameter changed

I1712 New flash file received

I1725 Sensor electronic module (ISEM) changed

I1726 Configuration backup failed

12.11 Resetting the measuring device

Using theDevice reset parameter (→  124) it is possible to reset the entire device
configuration or some of the configuration to a defined state.

Endress+Hauser 161
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass E 300 HART

12.11.1 Function scope of the "Device reset" parameter

Options Description

Cancel No action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

To delivery settings Every parameter for which a customer-specific default setting was ordered is reset
to this customer-specific value. All other parameters are reset to the factory
setting.

Restart device The restart resets every parameter whose data are in the volatile memory (RAM)
to the factory setting (e.g. measured value data). The device configuration remains
unchanged.

Restore S-DAT backup Restore the data that are saved on the S-DAT. The data record is restored from the
electronics memory to the S-DAT.

 This option is displayed only in an alarm condition.

12.12 Device information

The Device information submenu contains all parameters that display different
information for device identification.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Device information

‣ Device information

Device tag →  163

Serial number →  163

Firmware version →  163

Device name →  163

Manufacturer

Order code →  163

Extended order code 1 →  163

Extended order code 2 →  163

Extended order code 3 →  163

ENP version →  163

Device revision →  163

Device ID →  163

162 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Device type →  163

Manufacturer ID →  163

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface Factory setting

Device tag Shows name of measuring point. Max. 32 characters, such as Promass
letters, numbers or special
characters (e.g. @, %, /).

Serial number Shows the serial number of the measuring Max. 11-digit character string –
device. comprising letters and
numbers.

Firmware version Shows the device firmware version installed. Character string in the format –
xx.yy.zz

Device name Shows the name of the transmitter. Promass 300/500 –

 The name can be found on the

nameplate of the transmitter.

Order code Shows the device order code. Character string composed of –
letters, numbers and certain
 The order code can be found on the
nameplate of the sensor and punctuation marks (e.g. /).
transmitter in the "Order code" field.

Extended order code 1 Shows the 1st part of the extended order Character string –
code.

 The extended order code can also be

found on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

Extended order code 2 Shows the 2nd part of the extended order Character string –
code.

 The extended order code can also be

found on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

Extended order code 3 Shows the 3rd part of the extended order Character string –
code.

 The extended order code can also be

found on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

ENP version Shows the version of the electronic Character string 2.02.00
nameplate (ENP).

Device revision Shows the device revision with which the 2-digit hexadecimal number 6
device is registered with the HART
Communication Foundation.

Device ID Shows the device ID for identifying the 6-digit hexadecimal number –
device in a HART network.

Device type Shows the device type with which the 2-digit hexadecimal number 0x3B (for Promass 300/500)
measuring device is registered with the
HART Communication Foundation.

Manufacturer ID Shows the manufacturer ID device is 2-digit hexadecimal number 0x11 (for Endress+Hauser)
registered with the HART Communication
Foundation.

Endress+Hauser 163
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass E 300 HART

12.13 Firmware history

Release Firmware Order code for Firmware Documentation Documentation
date version "Firmware changes type
version"

09.2019 01.05.zz Option 66 • Gas Fraction Operating BA01484D/06/EN/03.19

Handler Instructions
Adaptive
Filter, Gas
Entrainment
Index
• Application-
specific Input
module
• Upgrading of
the Petroleum
application
package

164 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Release Firmware Order code for Firmware Documentation Documentation

date version "Firmware changes type
version"

10.2017 01.01.zz Option 71 • Petroleum new Operating BA01484D/06/EN/02.17

• Concentration Instructions
update
• OPC-UA with
Security new
• Local display -
enhanced
performance
and data entry
via text editor
• Optimized
keypad lock for
local display
• Improvements
and
enhancements
with regard to
custody
transfer
measurement
• Web server
feature update
• Support for
trend data
function
• Heartbeat
function
enhanced to
include
detailed
results (page
3/4 of the
report)
• Device
configuratio
n as PDF
(parameter
log, similar
to FDT
print)
• Network
capability of
Ethernet
(service)
interface
• Comprehensive
Heartbeat
feature update
• Local display -
support for
WLAN
infrastructure
mode
• Implementatio
n of reset code

08.2016 01.00.zz Option 78 Original firmware Operating BA01484D/06/EN/01.16

Instructions

It is possible to flash the firmware to the current version or the previous version using
the service interface. For the compatibility of the firmware version, see the "Device
history and compatibility" section →  166

Endress+Hauser 165
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass E 300 HART

For the compatibility of the firmware version with the previous version, the installed
device description files and operating tools, observe the information about the device
in the "Manufacturer's information" document.
The manufacturer's information is available:
• In the Download Area of the Endress+Hauser web site: www.endress.com →
Downloads
• Specify the following details:
• Product root: e.g. 8E3B
The product root is the first part of the order code: see the nameplate on the
device.
• Text search: Manufacturer's information
• Media type: Documentation – Technical Documentation

12.14 Device history and compatibility

The device model is documented in the order code on the nameplate of the device (e.g.
8F3BXX-XXX....XXXA1-XXXXXX).

Device model Release Change compared with earlier model Compatibility with
earlier model

A2 09.2019 I/O module with enhanced performance No

and functionality: see device firmware
01.05.zz →  164

A1 08.2016 – –

166 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Maintenance

13 Maintenance

13.1 Maintenance tasks

No special maintenance work is required.

13.1.1 Exterior cleaning

When cleaning the exterior of measuring devices, always use cleaning agents that do not
attack the surface of the housing or the seals.

13.1.2 Interior cleaning

Observe the following points for CIP and SIP cleaning:
• Use only cleaning agents to which the process-wetted materials are adequately resistant.
• Observe the maximum permitted medium temperature for the measuring device
→  189.

13.2 Measuring and test equipment

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of measuring and test equipment, such as W@M or
device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

List of some of the measuring and testing equipment: →  170

13.3 Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of services for maintenance such as recalibration,
maintenance service or device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

Endress+Hauser 167
Repair Proline Promass E 300 HART

14 Repair

14.1 General notes

14.1.1 Repair and conversion concept

The Endress+Hauser repair and conversion concept provides for the following:
• The measuring devices have a modular design.
• Spare parts are grouped into logical kits with the associated Installation Instructions.
• Repairs are carried out by Endress+Hauser Service or by appropriately trained customers.
• Certified devices can only be converted to other certified devices by Endress+Hauser
Service or at the factory.

14.1.2 Notes for repair and conversion

For repair and modification of a measuring device, observe the following notes:
‣ Use only original Endress+Hauser spare parts.
‣ Carry out the repair according to the Installation Instructions.
‣ Observe the applicable standards, federal/national regulations, Ex documentation (XA)
and certificates.
‣ Document every repair and each conversion and enter them into the W@M life cycle
management database.

14.2 Spare parts

Measuring device serial number:
Can be read out via the Serial number parameter (→  163) in the Device
information submenu.

14.3 Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide range of services.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

14.4 Return
The requirements for safe device return can vary depending on the device type and
national legislation.
1. Refer to the website for more information:
http://www.endress.com/support/return-material
2. Return the device if repairs or a factory calibration are required, or if the wrong
device was ordered or delivered.

14.5 Disposal

14.5.1 Removing the measuring device

1. Switch off the device.

168 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Repair

LWARNING
Danger to persons from process conditions.
‣ Beware of hazardous process conditions such as pressure in the measuring device, high
temperatures or aggressive fluids.

2. Carry out the mounting and connection steps from the "Mounting the measuring
device" and "Connecting the measuring device" sections in reverse order. Observe the
safety instructions.

14.5.2 Disposing of the measuring device

LWARNING
Danger to personnel and environment from fluids that are hazardous to health.
‣ Ensure that the measuring device and all cavities are free of fluid residues that are
hazardous to health or the environment, e.g. substances that have permeated into
crevices or diffused through plastic.

Observe the following notes during disposal:

‣ Observe valid federal/national regulations.
‣ Ensure proper separation and reuse of the device components.

Endress+Hauser 169
Accessories Proline Promass E 300 HART

15 Accessories
Various accessories, which can be ordered with the device or subsequently from Endress
+Hauser, are available for the device. Detailed information on the order code in question is
available from your local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of the
Endress+Hauser website: www.endress.com.

15.1 Device-specific accessories

15.1.1 For the transmitter

Accessories Description

Proline 300 transmitter Transmitter for replacement or storage. Use the order code to define the following
specifications:
• Approvals
• Output
• Input
• Display/operation
• Housing
• Software

 Order code: 8X3BXX

 Installation Instructions EA01263D
Remote display and • If ordered directly with the measuring device:
operating module Order code for "Display; operation", option O "Remote display 4-line illum.;
DKX001 10 m (30 ft) Cable; touch control"
• If ordered separately:
• Measuring device: order code for "Display; operation", option M "W/o, prepared
for remote display"
• DKX001: Via the separate product structure DKX001
• If ordered subsequently:
DKX001: Via the separate product structure DKX001
Mounting bracket for DKX001
• If ordered directly: order code for "Accessory enclosed", option RA "Mounting
bracket, pipe 1"/2""
• If ordered subsequently: order number: 71340960
Connecting cable (replacement cable)
Via the separate product structure: DKX002

 Further information on display and operating module DKX001→  195.

 Special Documentation SD01763D
External WLAN antenna External WLAN antenna with 1.5 m (59.1 in) connecting cable and two angle
brackets. Order code for "Accessory enclosed", option P8 "Wireless antenna wide
area".

 • applications.
The external WLAN antenna is not suitable for use in hygienic

• Further information on the WLAN interface →  64.

 Order number: 71351317

 Installation Instructions EA01238D
Protective cover Is used to protect the measuring device from the effects of the weather: e.g.
rainwater, excess heating from direct sunlight.

 Order number: 71343505

 Installation Instructions EA01160D

170 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Accessories

15.1.2 For the sensor

Accessories Description

Heating jacket Is used to stabilize the temperature of the fluids in the sensor. Water, water vapor
and other non-corrosive liquids are permitted for use as fluids.

 If using oil as a heating medium, please consult with Endress+Hauser.

Heating jackets cannot be used with sensors fitted with a rupture disk.
• If ordered together with the measuring device:
order code for "Enclosed accessories"
• Option RB "heating jacket, G 1/2" internal thread"
• Option RC "heating jacket, G 3/4" internal thread"
• Option RD "Heating jacket, NPT 1/2" internal thread"
• Option RE "Heating jacket, NPT 3/4" internal thread"
• If ordered subsequently:
Use the order code with the product root DK8003.

 Special Documentation SD02151D

15.2 Communication-specific accessories

Accessories Description

Commubox FXA195 For intrinsically safe HART communication with FieldCare via the USB interface.
HART
 Technical Information TI00404F
HART Loop Converter Is used to evaluate and convert dynamic HART process variables to analog current
HMX50 signals or limit values.

 •• Technical Information TI00429F

Operating Instructions BA00371F

Fieldgate FXA320 Gateway for the remote monitoring of connected 4-20 mA measuring devices via a
Web browser.

 Operating
Technical Information TI00025S
Instructions BA00053S

Fieldgate FXA520 Gateway for the remote diagnostics and remote configuration of connected HART
measuring devices via a Web browser.

 Operating
Technical Information TI00025S
Instructions BA00051S

Field Xpert SFX350 Field Xpert SFX350 is a mobile computer for commissioning and maintenance. It
enables efficient device configuration and diagnostics for HART devices and can be
used in non-hazardous areas.

 Operating Instructions BA01202S

Field Xpert SFX370 Field Xpert SFX370 is a mobile computer for commissioning and maintenance. It
enables efficient device configuration and diagnostics for HART devices and can be
used in the non-hazardous area and in the hazardous area.

 Operating Instructions BA01202S

Field Xpert SMT70 The Field Xpert SMT70 tablet PC for device configuration enables mobile plant
asset management in hazardous and non-hazardous areas. It is suitable for
commissioning and maintenance staff to manage field instruments with a digital
communication interface and to record progress.
This tablet PC is designed as an all-in-one solution with a preinstalled driver library
and is an easy-to-use, touch-sensitive tool which can be used to manage field
instruments throughout their entire life cycle.

 •• Operating
Technical Information TI01342S
Instructions BA01709S
• Product page: www.endress.com/smt70

Endress+Hauser 171
Accessories Proline Promass E 300 HART

15.3 Service-specific accessories

Accessories Description

Applicator Software for selecting and sizing Endress+Hauser measuring devices:

• Choice of measuring devices for industrial requirements
• Calculation of all the necessary data for identifying the optimum flowmeter:
e.g. nominal diameter, pressure loss, flow velocity and accuracy.
• Graphic illustration of the calculation results
• Determination of the partial order code, administration, documentation and
access to all project-related data and parameters over the entire life cycle of
a project.
Applicator is available:
• Via the Internet: https://portal.endress.com/webapp/applicator
• As a downloadable DVD for local PC installation.

W@M W@M Life Cycle Management

Improved productivity with information at your fingertips. Data relevant to a
plant and its components is generated from the first stages of planning and
during the asset’s complete life cycle.
W@M Life Cycle Management is an open and flexible information platform
with online and on-site tools. Instant access for your staff to current, in-depth
data shortens your plant’s engineering time, speeds up procurement processes
and increases plant uptime.
Combined with the right services, W@M Life Cycle Management boosts
productivity in every phase. For more information, visit
www.endress.com/lifecyclemanagement

FieldCare FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser.

It can configure all smart field units in your system and helps you manage
them. By using the status information, it is also a simple but effective way of
checking their status and condition.

 Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S

DeviceCare Tool to connect and configure Endress+Hauser field devices.

 Innovation brochure IN01047S

15.4 System components

Accessories Description

Memograph M graphic The Memograph M graphic data manager provides information on all the relevant
data manager measured variables. Measured values are recorded correctly, limit values are
monitored and measuring points analyzed. The data are stored in the 256 MB
internal memory and also on a SD card or USB stick.

 •• Technical Information TI00133R

Operating Instructions BA00247R

Cerabar M The pressure transmitter for measuring the absolute and gauge pressure of gases,
steam and liquids. It can be used to read in the operating pressure value.

 •• Technical Information TI00426P and TI00436P

Operating Instructions BA00200P and BA00382P

Cerabar S The pressure transmitter for measuring the absolute and gauge pressure of gases,
steam and liquids. It can be used to read in the operating pressure value.

 •• Operating
Technical Information TI00383P
Instructions BA00271P

iTEMP The temperature transmitters can be used in all applications and are suitable for
the measurement of gases, steam and liquids. They can be used to read in the
medium temperature.

 "Fields of Activity" document FA00006T

172 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Technical data

16 Technical data

16.1 Application
The measuring device is suitable for flow measurement of liquids and gases only.
Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentially
explosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
To ensure that the device remains in proper operating condition for its service life, use the
measuring device only for media against which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.

16.2 Function and system design

Measuring principle Mass flow measurement based on the Coriolis measuring principle

Measuring system The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor.

The device is available as a compact version:
The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.
For information on the structure of the device →  15

Endress+Hauser 173
Technical data Proline Promass E 300 HART

16.3 Input

Measured variable Direct measured variables

• Mass flow
• Density
• Temperature

Calculated measured variables

• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Reference density

Measuring range Measuring range for liquids

DN Measuring range full scale values min(F) to max(F)

[mm] [in] [kg/h] [lb/min]

8 ³⁄₈ 0 to 2 000 0 to 73.50

15 ½ 0 to 6 500 0 to 238.9

25 1 0 to 18 000 0 to 661.5

40 1½ 0 to 45 000 0 to 1 654

50 2 0 to 70 000 0 to 2 573

80 3 0 to 180 000 0 to 6 615

Measuring range for gases

The full scale value depends on the density and the sound velocity of the gas used and can
be calculated with the formula below:
max(G) = minimum (max(F) · ρG : x ; ρG · cG · π/2 · (di)2 · 3600)

 max(G) Maximum full scale value for gas [kg/h]

 max(F) Maximum full scale value for liquid [kg/h]

 max(G) <  max(F)  max(G) can never be greater than  max(F)

ρG Gas density in [kg/m³] at operating conditions

x Constant dependent on nominal diameter

cG Sound velocity (gas) [m/s]

di Measuring tube internal diameter [m]

DN x

[mm] [in] [kg/m3]

8 ³⁄₈ 85

15 ½ 110

25 1 125

40 1½ 125

50 2 125

80 3 155

174 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Technical data

Calculation example for gas

• Sensor: Promass E, DN 50
• Gas: Air with a density of 60.3 kg/m³ (at 20 °C and 50 bar)
• Measuring range (liquid): 70 000 kg/h
• x = 125 kg/m³ (for Promass E, DN 50)
Maximum possible full scale value:
 max(G) =  max(F) · ρG : x = 70 000 kg/h · 60.3 kg/m³ : 125 kg/m³ = 33 800 kg/h

Recommended measuring range

Flow limit →  191

Operable flow range Over 1000 : 1.

Flow rates above the preset full scale value do not override the electronics unit, with the
result that the totalizer values are registered correctly.

Input signal External measured values

To increase the accuracy of certain measured variables or to calculate the corrected volume
flow for gases, the automation system can continuously write different measured values to
the measuring device:
• Operating pressure to increase accuracy (Endress+Hauser recommends the use of a
pressure measuring device for absolute pressure, e.g. Cerabar M or Cerabar S)
• Medium temperature to increase accuracy (e.g. iTEMP)
• Reference density for calculating the corrected volume flow for gases
Various pressure transmitters and temperature measuring devices can be ordered
from Endress+Hauser: see "Accessories" section →  172
It is recommended to read in external measured values to calculate the corrected volume
flow.

HART protocol
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
the HART protocol. The pressure transmitter must support the following protocol-specific
functions:
• HART protocol
• Burst mode

Current input
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
the current input →  175.

Current input 0/4 to 20 mA

Current input 0/4 to 20 mA (active/passive)

Current span • 4 to 20 mA (active)

• 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)

Resolution 1 µA

Voltage drop Typically: 0.6 to 2 V for 3.6 to 22 mA (passive)

Maximum input voltage ≤ 30 V (passive)

Endress+Hauser 175
Technical data Proline Promass E 300 HART

Open-circuit voltage ≤ 28.8 V (active)

Possible input variables • Pressure

• Temperature
• Density
•

Status input

Maximum input values • DC –3 to 30 V

• If status input is active (ON): Ri >3 kΩ

Response time Configurable: 5 to 200 ms

Input signal level • Low signal: DC –3 to +5 V

• High signal: DC 12 to 30 V

Assignable functions • Off

• Reset the individual totalizers separately
• Reset all totalizers
• Flow override

176 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Technical data

16.4 Output

Output signal Current output 4 to 20 mA HART

Order code "Output; Input 1" (20):

Option BA: current output 4 to 20 mA HART

Signal mode Can be set to:

• Active
• Passive

Current range Can be set to:

• 4 to 20 mA NAMUR
• 4 to 20 mA US
• 4 to 20 mA
• 0 to 20 mA (only with signal mode active)
• Fixed current value

Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active)

Maximum input voltage DC 30 V (passive)

Load 250 to 700 Ω

Resolution 0.38 µA

Damping Configurable: 0 to 999 s

Assignable measured • Mass flow

variables • Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Temperature
• Electronics temperature
• Oscillation frequency 0
• Oscillation damping 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0

 The range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
application packages.

Current output 4 to 20 mA HART Ex i

Order code "Output; Input 1" (20) can be set to:

• Option CA: current output 4 to 20 mA HART Ex i passive
• Option CC: current output 4 to 20 mA HART Ex i active

Signal mode Depending on the ordered variant.

Current range Can be set to:

• 4 to 20 mA NAMUR
• 4 to 20 mA US
• 4 to 20 mA
• 0 to 20 mA (only with signal mode active)
• Fixed current value

Open-circuit voltage DC 21.8 V (active)

Maximum input voltage DC 30 V (passive)

Load • 250 to 400 Ω (active)

• 250 to 700 Ω (passive)

Resolution 0.38 µA

Endress+Hauser 177
Technical data Proline Promass E 300 HART

Damping Configurable: 0 to 999 s

Assignable measured • Mass flow

variables • Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Temperature
• Electronics temperature
• Oscillation frequency 0
• Oscillation damping 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0

 The range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
application packages.

Current output 4 to 20 mA

Order code "Output; Input 2" (21), "Output; Input 3" (022):
Option B: current output 4 to 20 mA

Signal mode Can be set to:

• Active
• Passive

Current range Can be set to:

• 4 to 20 mA NAMUR
• 4 to 20 mA US
• 4 to 20 mA
• 0 to 20 mA (only with signal mode active)
• Fixed current value

Maximum output values 22.5 mA

Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active)

Maximum input voltage DC 30 V (passive)

Load 0 to 700 Ω

Resolution 0.38 µA

Damping Configurable: 0 to 999 s

Assignable measured • Mass flow

variables • Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Temperature
• Electronics temperature
• Oscillation frequency 0
• Oscillation damping 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0

 The range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
application packages.

Current output 4 to 20 mA Ex i passive

Order code "Output; Input 2" (21), "Output; Input 3" (022):
Option C: current output 4 to 20 mA Ex i passive

Signal mode Passive

Current range Can be set to:

• 4 to 20 mA NAMUR
• 4 to 20 mA US
• 4 to 20 mA
• Fixed current value

178 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Technical data

Maximum output values 22.5 mA

Maximum input voltage DC 30 V

Load 0 to 700 Ω

Resolution 0.38 µA

Damping Configurable: 0 to 999 s

Assignable measured • Mass flow

variables • Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Temperature
• Electronics temperature
• Oscillation frequency 0
• Oscillation damping 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0

 The range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
application packages.

Pulse/frequency/switch output

Function Can be set to pulse, frequency or switch output

Version Open collector

Can be set to:
• Active
• Passive
• Passive NAMUR

 Ex-i, passive
Maximum input values DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active)

Voltage drop For 22.5 mA: ≤ DC 2 V

Pulse output

Maximum input values DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Maximum output current 22.5 mA (active)

Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active)

Pulse width Configurable: 0.05 to 2 000 ms

Maximum pulse rate 10 000 Impulse/s

Pulse value Adjustable

Assignable measured • Mass flow

variables • Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow

Frequency output

Maximum input values DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Maximum output current 22.5 mA (active)

Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active)

Output frequency Adjustable: end value frequency 2 to 10 000 Hz (f max = 12 500 Hz)

Damping Configurable: 0 to 999 s

Pulse/pause ratio 1:1

Endress+Hauser 179
Technical data Proline Promass E 300 HART

Assignable measured • Mass flow

variables • Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Temperature
• Electronics temperature
• Oscillation frequency 0
• Oscillation damping 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0

 The range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
application packages.

Switch output

Maximum input values DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active)

Switching behavior Binary, conductive or non-conductive

Switching delay Configurable: 0 to 100 s

Number of switching Unlimited

cycles

Assignable functions • Off

• On
• Diagnostic behavior
• Limit value
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Temperature
• Totalizer 1-3
• Flow direction monitoring
• Status
• Partially filled pipe detection
• Low flow cut off

 The range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
application packages.

Double pulse output

Function Double pulse

Version Open collector

Can be set to:
• Active
• Passive
• Passive NAMUR

Maximum input values DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active)

Voltage drop For 22.5 mA: ≤ DC 2 V

Output frequency Configurable: 0 to 1 000 Hz

Damping Configurable: 0 to 999 s

180 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Technical data

Pulse/pause ratio 1:1

Assignable measured • Mass flow

variables • Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Temperature

 The range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
application packages.

Relay output

Function Switch output

Version Relay output, galvanically isolated

Switching behavior Can be set to:

• NO (normally open), factory setting
• NC (normally closed)

Maximum switching • DC 30 V, 0.1 A

capacity (passive) • AC 30 V, 0.5 A

Assignable functions • Off

• On
• Diagnostic behavior
• Limit value
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Temperature
• Totalizer 1-3
• Flow direction monitoring
• Status
• Partially filled pipe detection
• Low flow cut off

 The range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
application packages.

User-configurable input/output
One specific input or output is assigned to a user-configurable input/output (configurable
I/O) during device commissioning.
The following inputs and outputs are available for assignment:
• Choice of current output: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)
• Pulse/frequency/switch output
• Choice of current input: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)
• Status input

Signal on alarm Depending on the interface, failure information is displayed as follows:

Endress+Hauser 181
Technical data Proline Promass E 300 HART

Current output 0/4 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA
Failure mode Choose from:
• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with NAMUR recommendation NE 43
• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with US
• Min. value: 3.59 mA
• Max. value: 22.5 mA
• Freely definable value between: 3.59 to 22.5 mA
• Actual value
• Last valid value

0 to 20 mA
Failure mode Choose from:
• Maximum alarm: 22 mA
• Freely definable value between: 0 to 20.5 mA

Pulse/frequency/switch output

Pulse output

Failure mode Choose from:

• Actual value
• No pulses

Frequency output

Failure mode Choose from:

• Actual value
• 0 Hz
• Defined value (f max 2 to 12 500 Hz)

Switch output

Failure mode Choose from:

• Current status
• Open
• Closed

Relay output

Failure mode Choose from:

• Current status
• Open
• Closed

Local display

Plain text display With information on cause and remedial measures

Backlight Red backlighting indicates a device error.

Status signal as per NAMUR recommendation NE 107

182 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Technical data

Interface/protocol
• Via digital communication:
HART protocol
• Via service interface
• CDI-RJ45 service interface
• WLAN interface

Plain text display With information on cause and remedial measures

Web browser

Plain text display With information on cause and remedial measures

Light emitting diodes (LED)

Status information Status indicated by various light emitting diodes

The following information is displayed depending on the device version:
• Supply voltage active
• Data transmission active
• Device alarm/error has occurred

 Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes →  145

Low flow cut off The switch points for low flow cut off are user-selectable.

Galvanic isolation The outputs are galvanically isolated from one another and from earth (PE).

Protocol-specific data Manufacturer ID 0x11

Device type ID 0x3B

HART protocol revision 7

Device description files Information and files under:

(DTM, DD) www.endress.com

HART load Min. 250 Ω

System integration Information on system integration →  70.

• Measured variables via HART protocol
• Burst Mode functionality

16.5 Power supply

Terminal assignment →  33

Supply voltage Order code for Terminal voltage Frequency range

"Power supply"

Option D DC24 V ±20% –

Option E AC100 to 240 V –15…+10% 50/60 Hz

DC24 V ±20% –
Option I
AC100 to 240 V –15…+10% 50/60 Hz

Endress+Hauser 183
Technical data Proline Promass E 300 HART

Power consumption Transmitter

Max. 10 W (active power)

switch-on current Max. 36 A (<5 ms) as per NAMUR Recommendation NE 21

Current consumption Transmitter

• Max. 400 mA (24 V)
• Max. 200 mA (110 V, 50/60 Hz; 230 V, 50/60 Hz)

Power supply failure • Totalizers stop at the last value measured.

• Depending on the device version, the configuration is retained in the device memoryor in
the pluggable data memory (HistoROM DAT).
• Error messages (incl. total operated hours) are stored.

Electrical connection →  33

Potential equalization →  36

terminals Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).

Cable entries • Cable gland: M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)
• Thread for cable entry:
• NPT ½"
• G ½"
• M20

Cable specification →  30

16.6 Performance characteristics

Reference operating • Error limits based on ISO 11631

conditions • Water with +15 to +45 °C (+59 to +113 °F) at2 to 6 bar (29 to 87 psi)
• Specifications as per calibration protocol
• Accuracy based on accredited calibration rigs that are traced to ISO 17025.
To obtain measured errors, use the Applicator sizing tool →  172

Maximum measured error o.r. = of reading; 1 g/cm³ = 1 kg/l; T = medium temperature

Base accuracy
Design fundamentals →  187

Mass flow and volume flow (liquids)

±0.15 % o.r.
±0.10 % o.r. (order code for "Calibration flow", option A, B, C, for mass flow)

184 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Technical data

Mass flow (gases)

±0.75 % o.r.

Density (liquids)

Under Standard density

reference operating conditions calibration 1)

[g/cm³] [g/cm³]

±0.0005 ±0.02

1) Valid over the entire temperature and density range

Temperature
±0.5 °C ± 0.005 · T °C (±0.9 °F ± 0.003 · (T – 32) °F)

Zero point stability

DN Zero point stability

[mm] [in] [kg/h] [lb/min]

8 ³⁄₈ 0.20 0.007

15 ½ 0.65 0.024

25 1 1.80 0.066

40 1½ 4.50 0.165

50 2 7.0 0.257

80 3 18.0 0.6615

Flow values
Flow values as turndown parameter depending on nominal diameter.

SI units

DN 1:1 1:10 1:20 1:50 1:100 1:500

[mm] [kg/h] [kg/h] [kg/h] [kg/h] [kg/h] [kg/h]

8 2 000 200 100 40 20 4

15 6 500 650 325 130 65 13

25 18 000 1 800 900 360 180 36

40 45 000 4 500 2 250 900 450 90

50 70 000 7 000 3 500 1 400 700 140

80 180 000 18 000 9 000 3 600 1 800 360

US units

DN 1:1 1:10 1:20 1:50 1:100 1:500

[inch] [lb/min] [lb/min] [lb/min] [lb/min] [lb/min] [lb/min]

³⁄₈ 73.50 7.350 3.675 1.470 0.735 0.147

½ 238.9 23.89 11.95 4.778 2.389 0.478

1 661.5 66.15 33.08 13.23 6.615 1.323

Endress+Hauser 185
Technical data Proline Promass E 300 HART

DN 1:1 1:10 1:20 1:50 1:100 1:500

[inch] [lb/min] [lb/min] [lb/min] [lb/min] [lb/min] [lb/min]

1½ 1 654 165.4 82.70 33.08 16.54 3.308

2 2 573 257.3 128.7 51.46 25.73 5.146

3 6 615 661.5 330.8 132.3 66.15 13.23

Accuracy of outputs
The outputs have the following base accuracy specifications.

Current output

Accuracy ±5 µA

Pulse/frequency output
o.r. = of reading

Accuracy Max. ±50 ppm o.r. (over the entire ambient temperature range)

Repeatability o.r. = of reading; 1 g/cm3 = 1 kg/l; T = medium temperature

Base repeatability
Design fundamentals →  187

Mass flow and volume flow (liquids)

±0.075 % o.r.
±0.05 % o.r. (calibration option, for mass flow)

Mass flow (gases)

±0.35 % o.r.

Density (liquids)
±0.00025 g/cm3

Temperature
±0.25 °C ± 0.0025 · T °C (±0.45 °F ± 0.0015 · (T–32) °F)

Response time The response time depends on the configuration (damping).

Influence of ambient Current output

temperature
Temperature coefficient Max. 1 μA/°C

Pulse/frequency output

Temperature coefficient No additional effect. Included in accuracy.

Influence of medium Mass flow and volume flow

temperature

186 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Technical data

o.f.s. = of full scale value

When there is a difference between the temperature for zero point adjustment and the
process temperature, the additional measured error of the sensor is typically ±0.0002 %
o.f.s./°C (±0.0001 % o. f.s./°F).
The effect is reduced if zero point adjustment is performed at process temperature.

Density
When there is a difference between the density calibration temperature and the process
temperature, the typical measured error of the sensor is
±0.0001 g/cm3 /°C (±0.00005 g/cm3 /°F). Field density calibration is possible.

3
[kg/m ]
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
-40 0 50 100 150 [°C]
-80 -40 0 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 [°F]
A0016609

 36 Field density calibration, for example at +20 °C (+68 °F)

Temperature
±0.005 · T °C (± 0.005 · (T – 32) °F)

Influence of medium The table below shows the effect on accuracy of mass flow due to a difference between
pressure calibration pressure and process pressure.
o.r. = of reading
It is possible to compensate for the effect by:
• Reading in the current pressure measured value via the current input.
• Specifying a fixed value for the pressure in the device parameters.
Operating Instructions.

DN [% o.r./bar] [% o.r./psi]

[mm] [in]

8 ³⁄₈ no influence

15 ½ no influence

25 1 no influence

40 1½ no influence

50 2 –0.009 –0.0006

80 3 –0.020 –0.0014

Design fundamentals o.r. = of reading, o.f.s. = of full scale value

BaseAccu = base accuracy in % o.r., BaseRepeat = base repeatability in % o.r.

Endress+Hauser 187
Technical data Proline Promass E 300 HART

MeasValue = measured value; ZeroPoint = zero point stability

Calculation of the maximum measured error as a function of the flow rate

Flow rate Maximum measured error in % o.r.

ZeroPoint
³ BaseAccu ⋅ 100 ± BaseAccu
A0021339
A0021332

ZeroPoint ZeroPoint
< BaseAccu ⋅ 100 MeasValue ⋅ 100
±
A0021333 A0021334

Calculation of the maximum repeatability as a function of the flow rate

Flow rate Maximum repeatability in % o.r.

½ ⋅ ZeroPoint
³ BaseRepeat ⋅ 100
A0021340
A0021335

½ ⋅ ZeroPoint ZeroPoint
< BaseRepeat ⋅ 100 ± ½ ⋅ MeasValue ⋅ 100
A0021336 A0021337

Example for maximum measured error

E [%]
2.5

2.0

1.5

1.0

0.5

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 Q [%]

A0030289

E Maximum measured error in % o.r. (example)

Q Flow rate in % of maximum full scale value

16.7 Installation
"Mounting requirements" →  22

16.8 Environment

Ambient temperature →  24→  24

range
Temperature tables
Observe the interdependencies between the permitted ambient and fluid
temperatures when operating the device in hazardous areas.
For detailed information on the temperature tables, see the separate document
entitled "Safety Instructions" (XA) for the device.

Storage temperature –50 to +80 °C (–58 to +176 °F)

188 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Technical data

Climate class DIN EN 60068-2-38 (test Z/AD)

Degree of protection Measuring device

• As standard: IP66/67, type 4X enclosure
• When housing is open: IP20, type 1 enclosure
• Display module: IP20, type 1 enclosure
• With the order code for "Sensor options", option CM: IP69 can also be ordered
External WLAN antenna
IP67

Vibration- and shock- Vibration broad-band random, according to IEC 60068-2-6

resistance • 2 to 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm peak
• 8.4 to 2 000 Hz, 1 g peak

Vibration broad-band random, according to IEC 60068-2-64

• 10 to 200 Hz, 0.003 g2/Hz
• 200 to 2 000 Hz, 0.001 g2/Hz
• Total: 1.54 g rms

Shock half-sine, according to IEC 60068-2-27

6 ms 30 g

Rough handling shocks, according to IEC 60068-2-31

Mechanical load Never use the transmitter housing as a ladder or climbing aid.

Electromagnetic As per IEC/EN 61326 and NAMUR Recommendation 21 (NE 21)

compatibility (EMC) Details are provided in the Declaration of Conformity.

16.9 Process

Medium temperature range –40 to +150 °C (–40 to +302 °F)

Endress+Hauser 189
Technical data Proline Promass E 300 HART

Dependency of ambient temperature on medium temperature

Ta

A
B

Tm
A0031121

 37 Exemplary representation, values in the table below.

Ta Ambient temperature range
Tm Medium temperature
A Maximum permitted medium temperature Tm at Ta max = 60 °C (140 °F); higher medium temperatures Tm
require a reduced ambient temperature Ta
B Maximum permitted ambient temperature Ta for the maximum specified medium temperature Tm of the
sensor

Values for devices used in the hazardous area:

Separate Ex documentation (XA) for the device →  203.

Not insulated Insulated

A B A B

Ta Tm Ta Tm Ta Tm Ta Tm

60 °C (140 °F) 150 °C (302 °F) – – 60 °C (140 °F) 110 °C (230 °F) 55 °C (131 °F) 150 °C (302 °F)

Density 0 to 5 000 kg/m3 (0 to 312 lb/cf)

Pressure-temperature An overview of the pressure-temperature ratings for the process connections is

ratings provided in the "Technical Information" document

Sensor housing The sensor housing is filled with dry nitrogen gas and protects the electronics and
mechanics inside.
If a measuring tube fails (e.g. due to process characteristics like corrosive or abrasive
fluids), the fluid will initially be contained by the sensor housing.

Sensor housing nominal pressure rating and burst pressure

The secondary containment does not have a pressure rating classification.

Reference value for the pressure loading capacity of the sensor housing: 16 bar (232 psi)
If the device is fitted with a rupture disk (order code for "Sensor option", option CA "Rupture
disk"), the rupture disk trigger pressure is decisive for the maximum nominal pressure .

190 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Technical data

Rupture disk To increase the level of safety, a device version with a rupture disk with a trigger pressure
of 10 to 15 bar (145 to 217.5 psi)can be used (order code for "Sensor option", option CA
"rupture disk").
The use of rupture disks cannot be combined with the separately available heating jacket.

Flow limit Select the nominal diameter by optimizing between the required flow range and
permissible pressure loss.
For an overview of the full scale values for the measuring range, see the "Measuring
range" section →  174
• The minimum recommended full scale value is approx. 1/20 of the maximum full scale
value
• In most applications, 20 to 50 % of the maximum full scale value can be considered ideal
• A low full scale value must be selected for abrasive media (such as liquids with entrained
solids): flow velocity < 1 m/s (< 3 ft/s).
• For gas measurement the following rules apply:
• The flow velocity in the measuring tubes should not exceed half the sound velocity
(0.5 Mach).
• The maximum mass flow depends on the density of the gas: formula →  174
To calculate the flow limit, use the Applicator sizing tool →  172

Pressure loss To calculate the pressure loss, use the Applicator sizing tool →  172

System pressure →  24

16.10 Mechanical construction

Design, dimensions For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical
Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section.

Weight All values (weight exclusive of packaging material) refer to devices with EN/DIN
PN 40 flanges. Weight specifications including transmitter as per order code for "Housing",
option A "Aluminum, coated".
Different values due to different transmitter versions:
• Transmitter version for the hazardous area
(Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated"; Ex d): +2 kg (+4.4 lbs)
• Transmitter version for hygienic area
(Order code for "Housing", option B "Stainless, hygienic"): +0.2 kg (+0.44 lbs)

Weight in SI units

DN Weight [kg]
[mm]

8 5

15 5.5

25 7

40 11

Endress+Hauser 191
Technical data Proline Promass E 300 HART

DN Weight [kg]
[mm]

50 16

80 32

Weight in US units

DN Weight [lbs]
[in]

3/8 11

½ 12

1 15

1½ 24

2 35

3 71

Materials Transmitter housing

Order code for "Housing":
• Option A "Aluminum, coated": aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated
• Option B "Stainless, hygienic": stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)

Window material
Order code for "Housing":
• Option A "Aluminum, coated": glass
• Option B "Stainless, hygienic": polycarbonate

Seals
Order code for "Housing":
Option B "Stainless, hygienic": EPDM and silicone

Cable entries/cable glands

3
A0020640

 38 Possible cable entries/cable glands

1 Female thread M20 × 1.5
2 Cable gland M20 × 1.5
3 Adapter for cable entry with internal thread G ½" or NPT ½"

192 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Technical data

Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated"

The various cable entries are suitable for hazardous and non-hazardous areas.

Cable entry/cable gland Material

Non-Ex: plastic
Coupling M20 × 1.5
Z2, D2, Ex d/de: brass with plastic

Adapter for cable entry with internal thread G ½" Nickel-plated brass

Adapter for cable entry with internal thread NPT ½"

Order code for "Housing", option B "Stainless, hygienic"

The various cable entries are suitable for hazardous and non-hazardous areas.

Cable entry/cable gland Material

Cable gland M20 × 1.5 Plastic

Adapter for cable entry with internal thread G ½" Nickel-plated brass

Adapter for cable entry with internal thread NPT ½"

Sensor housing
• Acid and alkali-resistant outer surface
• Stainless steel 1.4301 (304)

Measuring tubes
Stainless steel, 1.4539 (904L); manifold: stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)

Process connections
• Flanges according to EN 1092-1 (DIN2501) / according to ASME B 16.5 / as per JIS
B2220:
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (F316/F316L)
• All other process connections:
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316/316L)
Available process connections→  194

Seals
Welded process connections without internal seals

Accessories
Protective cover
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)

External WLAN antenna

• Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylic ester-styrene-acrylonitrile) and nickel-plated brass
• Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass
• Cable: Polyethylene
• Plug: Nickel-plated brass
• Angle bracket: Stainless steel

Endress+Hauser 193
Technical data Proline Promass E 300 HART

Process connections • Fixed flange connections:

• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501) flange
• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2512N) flange
• Namur lengths in accordance with NE 132
• ASME B16.5 flange
• JIS B2220 flange
• DIN 11864-2 Form A flange, DIN 11866 series A, flange with notch
• Clamp connections:
Tri-Clamp (OD tubes), DIN 11866 series C
• Thread:
• DIN 11851 thread, DIN 11866 series A
• SMS 1145 thread
• ISO 2853 thread, ISO 2037
• DIN 11864-1 Form A thread, DIN 11866 series A
• VCO connections:
• 8-VCO-4
• 12-VCO-4
Process connection materials →  193

Surface roughness All data relate to parts in contact with fluid. The following surface roughness quality can
be ordered.
• Not polished
• Ramax = 0.8 µm (32 µin)
• Ramax = 0.4 µm (16 µin)

16.11 Human interface

Languages Can be operated in the following languages:

• Via local operation
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Bahasa (Indonesian), Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish
• Via Web browser
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Bahasa (Indonesian), Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish
• Via "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool: English, German, French, Spanish, Italian,
Chinese, Japanese

Local operation Via display module

Equipment:
• Order code for "Display; operation", option F "4-line, illuminated, graphic display;
touch control"
• Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated, graphic display;
touch control + WLAN"
Information about WLAN interface →  64

194 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Technical data

A0026785

 39 Operation with touch control

Display elements
• 4-line, illuminated, graphic display
• White background lighting; switches to red in event of device errors
• Format for displaying measured variables and status variables can be individually
configured
• Permitted ambient temperature for the display: –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
The readability of the display may be impaired at temperatures outside the temperature
range.

Operating elements
• External operation via touch control (3 optical keys) without opening the housing: ,
, 
• Operating elements also accessible in the various zones of the hazardous area

Via remote display and operating module DKX001

The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra
→  170.
• The remote display and operating module DKX001 is only available for the
following housing version: order code for "Housing": option A "Aluminum, coated"
• The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote
display and operating module DKX001 is ordered directly with the measuring
device. Display or operation at the transmitter is not possible in this case.
• If ordered subsequently, the remote display and operating module DKX001 may not
be connected at the same time as the existing measuring device display module.
Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any one
time.

A0026786

 40 Operation via remote display and operating module DKX001

Display and operating elements

The display and operating elements correspond to those of the display module →  194.

Endress+Hauser 195
Technical data Proline Promass E 300 HART

Material
The housing material of the display and operating module DKX001 depends on the choice
of transmitter housing material.

Transmitter housing Remote display and operating module

Order code for "Housing" Material Material

Option A "Aluminum, coated" AlSi10Mg, coated AlSi10Mg, coated

Cable entry
Corresponds to the choice of transmitter housing, order code for "Electrical connection".

Connecting cable
→  31

Dimensions
Information on the dimensions:
"Mechanical construction" section of the "Technical Information" document.

Remote operation →  62

Service interface →  63

Supported operating tools Different operating tools can be used for local or remote access to the measuring device.
Depending on the operating tool used, access is possible with different operating units and
via a variety of interfaces.

Supported operating Operating unit Interface Additional information

tools

Web browser Notebook, PC or tablet • CDI-RJ45 service Special Documentation for

with Web browser interface device →  204
• WLAN interface

DeviceCare SFE100 Notebook, PC or tablet • CDI-RJ45 service →  172

with Microsoft Windows interface
system • WLAN interface
• Fieldbus protocol

196 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Technical data

Supported operating Operating unit Interface Additional information

tools

FieldCare SFE500 Notebook, PC or tablet • CDI-RJ45 service →  172

with Microsoft Windows interface
system • WLAN interface
• Fieldbus protocol

Device Xpert Field Xpert SFX HART and Operating Instructions

100/350/370 FOUNDATION Fieldbus BA01202S
fieldbus protocol Device description files:
Use update function of
handheld terminal

Other operating tools based on FDT technology with a device driver such as DTM/
iDTM or DD/EDD can be used for device operation. These operating tools are available
from the individual manufacturers. Integration into the following operating tools,
among others, is supported:
• FactoryTalk AssetCentre (FTAC) by Rockwell Automation →
www.rockwellautomation.com
• Process Device Manager (PDM) by Siemens → www.siemens.com
• Asset Management Solutions (AMS) by Emerson → www.emersonprocess.com
• FieldCommunicator 375/475 by Emerson → www.emersonprocess.com
• Field Device Manager (FDM) by Honeywell → www.honeywellprocess.com
• FieldMate by Yokogawa → www.yokogawa.com
• PACTWare → www.pactware.com
The associated device description files are available at: www.endress.com →
Downloads

Web server
Thanks to the integrated Web server, the device can be operated and configured via a Web
browser and via a service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via a WLAN interface. The structure of
the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values,
status information on the device is also displayed and allows the user to monitor the status
of the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters
can be configured.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication by
computer or a mobile handheld terminal.
Supported functions
Data exchange between the operating unit (such as a notebook for example) and the
measuring device:
• Upload the configuration from the measuring device (XML format, configuration
backup)
• Save the configuration to the measuring device (XML format, restore configuration)
• Export event list (.csv file)
• Export parameter settings (.csv file or PDF file, document the measuring point
configuration)
• Export the Heartbeat verification log (PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat
Verification" application package)
• Flash firmware version for device firmware upgrade, for instance
• Download driver for system integration
• Visualize up to 1000 saved measured values (only available with the Extended
HistoROM application package →  202)
Web server special documentation →  204

Endress+Hauser 197
Technical data Proline Promass E 300 HART

HistoROM The measuring device features HistoROM data management. HistoROM data management
data management comprises both the storage and import/export of key device and process data, making
operation and servicing far more reliable, secure and efficient.
When the device is delivered, the factory settings of the configuration data are stored
as a backup in the device memory. This memory can be overwritten with an updated
data record, for example after commissioning.

Additional information on the data storage concept

There are different types of data storage units in which device data are stored and used by the device:
Device memory T-DAT S-DAT

Available data • Event logbook such as diagnostic • Measured value logging ("Extended • Sensor data: nominal diameter etc.
events for example HistoROM" order option) • Serial number
• Parameter data record backup • Current parameter data record (used by • Calibration data
• Device firmware package firmware at run time) • Device configuration (e.g. SW options,
• Peakhold indicator (min/max values) fixed I/O or multi I/O)
• Totalizer values

Storage location Fixed on the user interface board in Attachable to the user interface board in the In the sensor plug in the transmitter neck
the connection compartment connection compartment part

Data backup
Automatic
• The most important device data (sensor and transmitter) are automatically saved in the
DAT modules
• If the transmitter or measuring device is replaced: once the T-DAT containing the
previous device data has been exchanged, the new measuring device is ready for
operation again immediately without any errors
• If the sensor is replaced: once the sensor has been replaced, new sensor data are
transferred from the S-DAT in the measuring device and the measuring device is ready
for operation again immediately without any errors
• If exchanging the electronics module (e.g. I/O electronics module): Once the electronics
module has been replaced, the software of the module is compared against the current
device firmware. The module software is upgraded or downgraded where necessary. The
electronics module is available for use immediately afterwards and no compatibility
problems occur.
Manual
Additional parameter data record (complete parameter settings) in the integrated device
memory HistoROM backup for:
• Data backup function
Backup and subsequent restoration of a device configuration in the device memory
HistoROM backup
• Data comparison function
Comparison of the current device configuration with the device configuration saved in
the device memory HistoROM backup

Data transfer
Manual
Transfer of a device configuration to another device using the export function of the
specific operating tool, e.g. with FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server: to duplicate the
configuration or to store in an archive (e.g. for backup purposes)

198 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Technical data

Event list
Automatic
• Chronological display of up to 20 event messages in the events list
• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled: up to 100
event messages are displayed in the events list along with a time stamp, plain text
description and remedial measures
• The events list can be exported and displayed via a variety of interfaces and operating
tools e.g. DeviceCare, FieldCare or Web server

Data logging
Manual
If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled:
• Record up to 1 000 measured values via 1 to 4 channels
• User configurable recording interval
• Record up to 250 measured values via each of the 4 memory channels
• Export the measured value log via a variety of interfaces and operating tools e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or web server

16.12 Certificates and approvals

Currently available certificates and approvals can be called up via the product
configurator.

CE mark The device meets the legal requirements of the applicable EU Directives. These are listed in
the corresponding EU Declaration of Conformity along with the standards applied.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.

RCM-tick symbol The measuring system meets the EMC requirements of the "Australian Communications
and Media Authority (ACMA)".

Ex approval The devices are certified for use in hazardous areas and the relevant safety instructions are
provided in the separate "Safety Instructions" (XA) document. Reference is made to this
document on the nameplate.

Sanitary compatibility • 3-A approval

• Only measuring devices with the order code for "Additional approval", option LP "3A"
have 3-A approval.
• The 3-A approval refers to the measuring device.
• When installing the measuring device, ensure that no liquid can accumulate on the
outside of the measuring device.
Remote transmitters must be installed in accordance with the 3-A Standard.
• Accessories (e.g. heating jacket, weather protection cover, wall holder unit) must be
installed in accordance with the 3-A Standard.
Each accessory can be cleaned. Disassembly may be necessary under certain
circumstances.
• EHEDG-tested
Only devices with the order code for "Additional approval", option LT "EHEDG" have been
tested and meet the requirements of the EHEDG.
To meet the requirements for EHEDG certification, the device must be used with process
connections in accordance with the EHEDG position paper entitled "Easy Cleanable Pipe
Couplings and Process Connections" (www.ehedg.org).
• FDA
• Food Contact Materials Regulation (EC) 1935/2004

Endress+Hauser 199
Technical data Proline Promass E 300 HART

Pharmaceutical • FDA
compatibility • USP Class VI
• TSE/BSE Certificate of Suitability
• cGMP
Devices with the order code "Test, Certificate", option JG "Conformity to cGMP derived
requirements, declaration" meet the requirements of cGMP in regards of wetted parts
surface finish, design, FDA 21 CFR material compliance, USP Class VI testing, and
TSE/BSE compliance.
A serial number specific manufacturers declaration is delivered with the device.

Functional safety The measuring device can be used for flow monitoring systems (min., max., range) up to
SIL 2 (single-channel architecture; order code for "Additional approval", option LA) and SIL
3 (multichannel architecture with homogeneous redundancy) and is independently
evaluated and certified by the TÜV in accordance with IEC 61508.
The following types of monitoring in safety equipment are possible:
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Density
Functional Safety Manual with information on the SIL device →  203

HART certification HART interface

The measuring device is certified and registered by the FieldComm Group. The measuring
system meets all the requirements of the following specifications:
• Certified according to HART 7
• The device can also be operated with certified devices of other manufacturers
(interoperability)

Pressure Equipment • With the identification PED/G1/x (x = category) on the sensor nameplate,
Directive Endress+Hauser confirms conformity with the "Essential Safety Requirements" specified
in Appendix I of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.
• Devices not bearing this marking (PED) are designed and manufactured according to
good engineering practice. They meet the requirements of Article 4 paragraph 3 of the
Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU. The range of application is indicated in
tables 6 to 9 in Annex II of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.

Radio approval The measuring device has radio approval.

For detailed information regarding radio approval, see Special Documentation
→  204

Additional certification CRN approval

Some device versions have CRN approval. A CRN-approved process connection with a CSA
approval must be ordered for a CRN-approved device.

Tests and certificates

• EN10204-3.1 material certificate, parts and sensor housing in contact with medium
• Pressure testing, internal procedure, inspection certificate
• PMI test (XRF), internal procedure, wetted parts, test report
• EN10204-2.1 confirmation of compliance with the order and EN10204-2.2 test report

200 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Technical data

Other standards and • EN 60529

guidelines Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
• IEC/EN 60068-2-6
Environmental influences: Test procedure - Test Fc: vibrate (sinusoidal).
• IEC/EN 60068-2-31
Environmental influences: Test procedure - Test Ec: shocks due to rough handling,
primarily for devices.
• EN 61010-1
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory
use - general requirements
• IEC/EN 61326
Emission in accordance with Class A requirements. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC
requirements).
• NAMUR NE 21
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of industrial process and laboratory control
equipment
• NAMUR NE 32
Data retention in the event of a power failure in field and control instruments with
microprocessors
• NAMUR NE 43
Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitters
with analog output signal.
• NAMUR NE 53
Software of field devices and signal-processing devices with digital electronics
• NAMUR NE 80
The application of the pressure equipment directive to process control devices
• NAMUR NE 105
Specifications for integrating fieldbus devices in engineering tools for field devices
• NAMUR NE 107
Self-monitoring and diagnosis of field devices
• NAMUR NE 131
Requirements for field devices for standard applications
• NAMUR NE 132
Coriolis mass meter
• ETSI EN 300 328
Guidelines for 2.4 GHz radio components.
• EN 301489
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM).

16.13 Application packages

Many different application packages are available to enhance the functionality of the
device. Such packages might be needed to address safety aspects or specific application
requirements.
The application packages can be ordered with the device or subsequently from
Endress+Hauser. Detailed information on the order code in question is available from your
local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of the Endress+Hauser website:
www.endress.com.
Detailed information on the application packages:
Special Documentation for the device →  203

Endress+Hauser 201
Technical data Proline Promass E 300 HART

Diagnostics functions Package Description

Extended HistoROM Comprises extended functions concerning the event log and the activation of the
measured value memory.
Event log:
Memory volume is extended from 20 message entries (standard version) to up to
100 entries.
Data logging (line recorder):
• Memory capacity for up to 1000 measured values is activated.
• 250 measured values can be output via each of the 4 memory channels. The
recording interval can be defined and configured by the user.
• Measured value logs can be accessed via the local display or operating tool e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server.

Heartbeat Technology Package Description

Heartbeat Verification Heartbeat Verification

+Monitoring Meets the requirement for traceable verification to DIN ISO 9001:2008 Chapter
7.6 a) "Control of monitoring and measuring equipment".
• Functional testing in the installed state without interrupting the process.
• Traceable verification results on request, including a report.
• Simple testing process via local operation or other operating interfaces.
• Clear measuring point assessment (pass/fail) with high test coverage within the
framework of manufacturer specifications.
• Extension of calibration intervals according to operator's risk assessment.
Heartbeat Monitoring
Continuously supplies data, which are characteristic of the measuring principle, to
an external condition monitoring system for the purpose of preventive
maintenance or process analysis. These data enable the operator to:
• Draw conclusions - using these data and other information - about the impact
process influences (such as corrosion, abrasion, buildup etc.) have on the
measuring performance over time.
• Schedule servicing in time.
• Monitor the process or product quality, e.g. gas pockets.

Concentration Package Description

Concentration Calculation and outputting of fluid concentrations

The measured density is converted to the concentration of a substance of a binary
mixture using the "Concentration" application package:
• Choice of predefined fluids (e.g. various sugar solutions, acids, alkalis, salts,
ethanol etc.)
• Common or user-defined units (°Brix, °Plato, % mass, % volume, mol/l etc.) for
standard applications.
• Concentration calculation from user-defined tables.

Petroleum Package Description

Petroleum The most important parameters for the Oil & Gas Industry can be calculated and
displayed with this application package.
• Corrected volume flow and calculated reference density in accordance with the
"API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards, Chapter 11.1"
• Water content, based on density measurement
• Weighted mean of the density and temperature

OPC-UA server Package Description

OPC-UA-Server The application package provides the user with an integrated OPC-UA server for
comprehensive instrument services for IoT and SCADA applications.

 Special
→  204.
Documentation for the "OPC-UA-Server" application package

202 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Technical data

16.14 Accessories
Overview of accessories available for order →  170

16.15 Supplementary documentation

For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to the
following:
• W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number
from nameplate
• Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate or
scan the 2D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate

Standard documentation Brief Operating Instructions

Brief Operating Instructions for the sensor

Measuring device Documentation code

Proline Promass E KA01260D

Brief Operating Instructions for transmitter

Measuring device Documentation code

Proline 300 KA01309D

Technical Information

Measuring device Documentation code

Promass E 300 TI01272D

Description of Device Parameters

Measuring device Documentation code

Promass 300 GP01057D

Device-dependent Safety instructions

additional documentation Safety instructions for electrical equipment for hazardous areas.

Contents Documentation code

ATEX/IECEx Ex d/Ex de XA01405D

ATEX/IECEx Ex ec XA01439D

cCSAus XP XA01373D

cCSAus Ex d/ Ex de XA01372D

cCSAus Ex nA XA01507D

INMETRO Ex d/Ex de XA01468D

INMETRO Ex ec XA01470D

NEPSI Ex d/Ex de XA01469D

NEPSI Ex nA XA01471D

EAC Ex d/Ex de XA01656D

Endress+Hauser 203
Technical data Proline Promass E 300 HART

Contents Documentation code

EAC Ex nA XA01657D

JPN Ex d XA01778D

Remote display and operating module DKX001

Contents Documentation code

ATEX/IECEx Ex i XA01494D

ATEX/IECEx Ex ec XA01498D

cCSAus IS XA01499D

cCSAus Ex nA XA01513D

INMETRO Ex i XA01500D

INMETRO Ex ec XA01501D

NEPSI Ex i XA01502D

NEPSI Ex nA XA01503D

Special Documentation

Contents Documentation code

Information on the Pressure Equipment Directive SD01614D

Functional Safety Manual SD01727D

Remote display and operating module DKX001 SD01763D

Radio approvals for WLAN interface for A309/A310 display module SD01793D

Web server SD01662D

OPC-UA Server SD02039D

Heartbeat Technology SD01642D

Concentration measurement SD01644D

Petroleum SD02097D

Installation Instructions

Content Comment

Installation instructions for spare part sets and accessories • Access the overview of all the available spare part sets via
W@M Device Viewer →  168
• Accessories available for order with Installation Instructions →  170

204 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Index

Index
0…9 Connection preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3-A approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Connection tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Context menu
A Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Access authorization to parameters Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 D
Incorrect input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 129
Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 189
Adapting the status signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Additional certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Design fundamentals
Ambient temperature Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
AMS Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Device description files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Application packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Device documentation
Applicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Device history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Device locking, status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
B Device name
Burst mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
C Device repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Cable entries Device revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Device type ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Cable entry DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 199 Diagnostic behavior
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
cGMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Check Diagnostic information
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Design, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 151
Checklist DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Light emitting diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Cleaning Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Cleaning in place (CIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Remedial measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Sterilization in place (SIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Climate class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Diagnostics
Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 DIP switches
Communication-specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 see Write protection switch
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Direct access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31 Direct access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Disabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Connecting the signal cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Display
Connecting the supply voltage cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 see Onsite display
Connection Display and operating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . . . 195
see Electrical connection

Endress+Hauser 205
Index Proline Promass E 300 HART

Display area Field Communicator

For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Field Communicator 475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Display values Field of application
For locking status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Residual risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Field Xpert
Document Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Field Xpert SFX350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
E User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Firmware
Using operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 50 Release date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
EHDEG-certified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Electrical connection Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Commubox FXA195 (USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Flow direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 28
Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Explorer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Food Contact Materials Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Field Communicator 475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Function range
Field Xpert SFX350/SFX370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Field Xpert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Field Xpert SMT70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Function scope
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 AMS Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, AMS Device Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Manager, SIMATIC PDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Field Communicator 475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Operating tools SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Via HART protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Functional safety (SIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Functions
Via WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 see Parameters
VIATOR Bluetooth modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 G
WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 H
Enabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Hardware write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Enabling/disabling the keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 HART certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Endress+Hauser services HART protocol
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Device variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Environment Help text
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Vibration- and shock-resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Error messages HistoROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
see Diagnostic messages
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 I
Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Identifying the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Extended order code Influence
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Medium pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Medium temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Inlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
F Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
FDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 200 Inspection
Received goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

206 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Index

Inspection check Medium temperature

Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Menu
Installation conditions Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Inlet and outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Menus
Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 For measuring device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 For specific settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Mounting dimensions
Rupture disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 see Installation dimensions
Sensor heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Mounting preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Thermal insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Mounting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 N
Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Nameplate
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
L Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Languages, operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Navigation path (navigation view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Line recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Navigation view
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 In the submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 In the wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
see Diagnostic message Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
see In alarm condition
see Operational display O
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Onsite display
Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
M Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Main electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Operable flow range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 148
Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Operating keys
Manufacturer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 see Operating elements
Manufacturing date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 18 Operating menu
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Menus, submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Measured values Submenus and user roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
see Process variables Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Measuring device Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Order code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 18
Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Orientation (vertical, horizontal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Preparing for electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Preparing for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 P
Switch-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Parameter
Measuring range Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Calculation example for gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Entering values or text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
For gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Parameter settings
For liquids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Administration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Measuring range, recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Advanced setup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Burst configuration 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . 74
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Calculated values (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Medium pressure Configuration backup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Endress+Hauser 207
Index Proline Promass E 300 HART

Current input (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 RCM-tick symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Current input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Current output (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Data logging (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Define access code (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Device information (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Remedial measures
Diagnostics (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Display (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Display (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Double pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Double pulse output (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . 102, 137 Repair of a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Repairs
I/O configuration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Low flow cut off (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Measured variables (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Replacement
Partially filled pipe detection (Wizard) . . . . . . . . 109 Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Requirements for personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Pulse/frequency/switch output (Wizard) . . 90, 92, 96 Response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n (Submenu) 136 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Rupture disk
Relay output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Relay output 1 to n (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Triggering pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Reset access code (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Select medium (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 S
Sensor adjustment (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Setup (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Sanitary compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Simulation (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Sensor
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Status input (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Sensor heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Status input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Sensor housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
System units (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 18
Totalizer (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Totalizer 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Settings
Totalizer handling (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Adapting the measuring device to the process
Value current output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . 135 conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Web server (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
WLAN Settings (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Advanced display configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Zero point adjustment (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Pharmaceutical compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Device reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Post-connection check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Double pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Post-installation check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Power supply failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Pressure Equipment Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Partial filled pipe detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Pressure-temperature ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 92
Process variables Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Resetting the totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Measured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Protecting parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
R System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Radio approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Tag name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

208 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass E 300 HART Index

Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Zero point adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Surface roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Showing data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Symbols
SIL (functional safety) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Controlling data entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 For communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 For diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Software release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 For locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Spare part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 For measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 For measurement channel number . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 For menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Special mounting instructions For parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Sanitary compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 For status signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 For submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Status area For wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 In the status area of the local display . . . . . . . . . . . 45
In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Status signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 150 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Storage concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 System design
Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 see Measuring device design
Storage temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Structure System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 T
Submenu Technical data, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 124 Temperature range
Advanced setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 111 Ambient temperature range for display . . . . . . . . 194
Burst configuration 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Medium temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Calculated values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Configuration backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Current input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Tests and certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Thermal insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Double pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 137 Tool tip
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 see Help text
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Tools
Input values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 For mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Measured variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Totalizer
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Transmitter
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . 136 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Turning the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Reset access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Transporting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Troubleshooting
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 TSE/BSE Certificate of Suitability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Status input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Turning the electronics housing
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 see Turning the transmitter housing
Totalizer 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Turning the transmitter housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Totalizer handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Value current output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 U
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Use of the measuring device
WLAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Borderline cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Endress+Hauser 209
Index Proline Promass E 300 HART

Incorrect use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
see Designated use
User interface
Current diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Previous diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
User roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
USP Class VI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

V
Version data for the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Vibration- and shock-resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

W
W@M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 168
W@M Device Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 168
Weight
SI units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Transport (notes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
US units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Wizard
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Partially filled pipe detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . 90, 92, 96
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Select medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Write protection
Via access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Via write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

210 Endress+Hauser
www.addresses.endress.com